Nikon Digital Camera 17002 User Manual

%N  
4HE .IKON 'UIDE TO $IGITAL 0HOTOGRAPHY  
WITH THE  
$)')4!, #!-%2!  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About This Manual  
The topics in this manual are arranged in order from easy to advanced.  
These chapters cover all you need to know for  
simple, “point-and-shoot” photography  
Read these chapters for a complete descrip-  
tion of all aspects of camera operation  
Introduction (page 1)  
Learn the names of camera parts and ready the camera for use.  
Tutorial: Photography and Playback (page 17)  
The basic operations involved in taking photographs and playing them back.  
Reference: More on Photography (page 26)  
Play with exposure and explore the creative possibilities of  
some of the camera’s more advanced settings.  
Reference: More on Playback (page 98)  
Learn more about camera playback, transferring photo-  
graphs to a computer, and printing photographs.  
Setup: Basic Camera Settings (page 115)  
Basic camera setup, including formatting memory cards and setting the camera  
clock.  
Setup: Shooting, Playback, and Custom Settings (page 124)  
Read this chapter for more information on Custom Settings  
and on shooting and playback options.  
Technical Notes (page 173)  
Read this chapter for information on camera specifications, accessories, and trouble-  
shooting.  
Trademark Information  
Macintosh, Mac OS, and QuickTime are registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks  
of Microsoft Corporation. CompactFlash is a trademark of SanDisk Corporation. Lexar Media is a trademark of Lexar Media Corporation.  
Microdrive is a trademark of Hitachi Global Storage Technologies in the United States and other countries. Adobe and Acrobat are  
registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Inc. PictBridge is a trademark. All other trade names mentioned in this manual or the other  
documentation provided with your Nikon product are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Tutorial  
Photography and Playback  
More on Photography  
More on Playback  
Reference  
Setup  
Basic Camera Settings:  
The Setup Menu  
Shooting Options:  
The Shooting Menu  
Playback Options:  
The Playback Menu  
Custom Settings:  
The Custom Settings Menu  
Technical Notes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
i
For Your Safety  
To prevent damage to your Nikon product or injury to yourself or to others, read  
the following safety precautions in their entirety before using this equipment.  
Keep these safety instructions where all those who use the product will read  
them.  
The consequences that could result from failure to observe the precautions listed  
in this section are indicated by the following symbol:  
This icon marks warnings, information that should be read before using this Nikon  
product to prevent possible injury.  
WARNINGS  
Do not disassemble  
Do not look at the sun through the viewfinder  
Viewing the sun or other strong light  
source through the viewfinder could  
cause permanent visual impairment.  
Touching the product’s internal parts  
could result in injury. In the event of  
a malfunction, the product should be  
repaired only by a qualified technician.  
Should the product break open as the re-  
sult of a fall or other accident, remove the  
battery and/or AC adapter and then take  
the product to a Nikon-authorized service  
center for inspection.  
Turn off immediately in the event of malfunction  
Should you notice smoke or an unusual  
smell coming from the equipment or  
from the AC adapter (available separately),  
unplug the AC adapter and remove the  
battery immediately, taking care to avoid  
burns. Continued operation could result  
in injury. After removing the battery, take  
the equipment to a Nikon-authorized ser-  
vice center for inspection.  
Observe proper precautions when handling bat-  
teries  
Batteries may leak or explode if improp-  
erly handled. Observe the following pre-  
cautions when handling batteries for use  
in this product:  
• Be sure the product is off before replacing  
the battery. If you are using an AC adapt-  
er, be sure it is unplugged.  
• Use only batteries approved for use in this  
equipment. Do not mix old and new bat-  
teries or batteries of different types.  
• Do not attempt to insert the battery up-  
side down or backwards.  
Do not use in the presence of flammable gas  
Do not use electronic equipment in the  
presence of flammable gas, as this could  
result in explosion or fire.  
Do not place strap around the neck of an infant  
or child  
Placing the camera strap around the neck  
of an infant or child could result in stran-  
gulation.  
• Do not short or disassemble the battery.  
• Do not expose the battery to flame or to  
excessive heat.  
• Do not immerse in or expose to water.  
• Replace the terminal cover when trans-  
porting the battery. Do not transport or  
store with metal objects such as neck-  
laces or hairpins.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ii  
• Batteries are prone to leakage when  
fully discharged. To avoid damage to the  
product, be sure to remove the battery  
when no charge remains.  
• When the battery is not in use, attach the  
terminal cover and store in a cool place.  
• Immediately after use, or when the prod-  
uct is used on battery power for an ex-  
tended period, the battery may become  
hot. Before removing the battery, turn  
the camera off and allow the battery to  
cool.  
CD-ROMs  
The CD-ROMs on which the software  
and manuals are distributed should not  
be played back on audio CD equipment.  
Playing CD-ROMs on an audio CD player  
could cause hearing loss or damage the  
equipment.  
Observe caution when using the flash  
• Do not operate the flash with the flash  
window touching a person or object.  
Failure to observe this precaution could  
result in burns or fire.  
• Using the flash close to your subject’s  
eyes could cause temporary visual impair-  
ment. Particular care should be observed  
if photographing infants, when the flash  
should be no less than one meter (39˝)  
from the subject.  
• Discontinue use immediately should you  
notice any changes in the battery, such as  
discoloration or deformation.  
Use appropriate cables  
When connecting cables to the input  
and output jacks, use only the cables pro-  
vided or sold by Nikon for the purpose, to  
maintain compliance with product regu-  
lations.  
When using the viewfinder  
When operating the diopter adjustment  
control with your eye to the viewfinder,  
care should be taken not to put your fin-  
ger in your eye accidentally.  
Keep out of reach of children  
Failure to observe this precaution could  
result in injury.  
Avoid contact with liquid crystal  
Should the monitor break, care should be  
taken to avoid injury due to broken glass  
and to prevent liquid crystal from the  
monitor touching the skin or entering the  
eyes or mouth.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iii  
Notices  
• No part of the manuals included with this • Nikon will not be held liable for any damages  
product may be reproduced, transmitted, tran- resulting from the use of this product.  
scribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated • While every effort has been made to ensure  
into any language in any form, by any means, that the information in these manuals is ac-  
without Nikon’s prior written permission.  
curate and complete, we would appreciate it  
• Nikon reserves the right to change the were you to bring any errors or omissions to  
specifications of the hardware and software the attention of the Nikon representative in  
described in these manuals at any time and your area (address provided separately).  
without prior notice.  
Notices for Customers in the U.S.A.  
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Radio Frequency Interference Statement  
This equipment has been tested and found  
D200  
to comply with the limits for a Class B digital  
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules.  
These limits are designed to provide reason-  
able protection against harmful interference  
in a residential installation. This equipment  
CAUTIONS  
Modifications  
generates, uses, and can radiate radio fre-  
quency energy and, if not installed and used  
The FCC requires the user to be notified that  
in accordance with the instructions, may cause  
any changes or modifications made to this de-  
harmful interference to radio communications.  
vice that are not expressly approved by Nikon  
However, there is no guarantee that interfer-  
Corporation may void the user’s authority to  
ence will not occur in a particular installation.  
If this equipment does cause harmful interfer-  
operate the equipment.  
ence to radio or television reception, which can  
be determined by turning the equipment off  
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct  
the interference by one or more of the follow-  
ing measures:  
Interface Cables  
Use the interface cables sold or provided by  
Nikon for your equipment. Using other inter-  
face cables may exceed the limits of Class B Part  
15 of the FCC rules.  
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
• Increase the separation between the equip-  
ment and receiver.  
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a  
circuit different from that to which the receiv-  
er is connected.  
Notice for Customers in the State of California  
WARNING: Handling the cord on this product  
will expose you to lead, a chemical known to  
the State of California to cause birth defects  
or other reproductive harm. Wash hands after  
handling.  
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/  
television technician for help.  
Nikon Inc.,  
1300 Walt Whitman Road, Melville, New York  
11747-3064, U.S.A.  
Tel.: 631-547-4200  
Notice for Customers in Canada  
CAUTION  
ATTENTION  
This class B digital apparatus meets all require- Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte  
ments of the Canadian Interference Causing toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le maté-  
Equipment Regulations.  
riel brouilleur du Canada.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iv  
Symbol for Separate Collection in European Countries  
This symbol indicates that this product is to be collected separately.  
The following apply only to users in European countries:  
• This product is designated for separate collection at an appropriate collection point.  
Do not dispose of as household waste.  
• For more information, contact the retailer or the local authorities in charge of waste  
management.  
Notice Concerning Prohibition of Copying or Reproduction  
Note that simply being in possession of material that has been digitally copied or reproduced by  
means of a scanner, digital camera or other device may be punishable by law.  
• Items prohibited by law from being copied or repro- • Cautions on certain copies and reproductions  
duced  
The government has issued cautions on cop-  
Do not copy or reproduce paper money, ies or reproductions of securities issued by  
coins, securities, government bonds, or local private companies (shares, bills, checks, gift  
government bonds, even if such copies or re- certificates, etc.), commuter passes, or coupon  
productions are stampedSample.”  
tickets, except when a minimum of necessary  
copies are to be provided for business use by  
a company. Also, do not copy or reproduce  
passports issued by the government, licenses  
issued by public agencies and private groups,  
The copying or reproduction of paper money,  
coins, or securities which are circulated in a  
foreign country is prohibited.  
Unless the prior permission of the govern- ID cards, and tickets, such as passes and meal  
ment has been obtained, the copying or coupons.  
reproduction of unused postage stamps or  
post cards issued by the government is pro-  
The copying or reproduction of copyrighted  
hibited.  
• Comply with copyright notices  
creative works such as books, music, paint-  
The copying or reproduction of stamps issued ings, woodcut prints, maps, drawings, mov-  
by the government and of certified docu- ies, and photographs is governed by national  
ments stipulated by law is prohibited.  
and international copyright laws. Do not use  
this product for the purpose of making illegal  
copies or to infringe copyright laws.  
Disposing of Data Storage Devices  
Please note that deleting images or formatting memory cards or other data storage devices does  
not completely erase the original image data. Deleted files can sometimes be recovered from  
discarded storage devices using commercially available software, potentially resulting in the ma-  
licious use of personal image data. Ensuring the privacy of such data is the user’s responsibility.  
Before discarding a data storage device or transferring ownership to another person, erase all  
data using commercial deletion software, or format the device and then completely refill it with  
images containing no private information (for example, pictures of empty sky). Be sure to also  
replace any pictures selected for preset white balance. Care should be taken to avoid injury or  
damage to property when physically destroying data storage devices.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v
Table of Contents  
For Your Safety.................................................................................................................................... ii  
Notices................................................................................................................................................... iv  
Introducction.............................................................................................................................  
Getting to Know the Camera.........................................................................................................  
First Steps .............................................................................................................................................  
1
2
8
Attaching a Lens...............................................  
8
Inserting Memory Cards .............................. 14  
Charging and Inserting the Battery...... 10 Adjusting Viewfinder Focus....................... 16  
Basic Setup........................................................... 12  
Tutoorriial: Photooggrraapphhyy aanndd PPllaayybbaacckk .................................................................... 17  
Basic Photography ............................................................................................................................ 17  
Basic Playback..................................................................................................................................... 22  
Reference ................................................................................................................ 23  
Using Camera Menus ....................................................................................................................... 24  
Reference: More on Photograaphyy ......................................................................... 26  
Choosing a Shooting Mode........................................................................................................... 26  
Image Quality and Size.................................................................................................................... 28  
Image Quality ..................................................... 28 Image Size............................................................. 32  
ISO Sensitivity ..................................................................................................................................... 33  
White Balance ..................................................................................................................................... 35  
Optimizing Images............................................................................................................................ 45  
Color Space.......................................................................................................................................... 50  
Focus ...................................................................................................................................................... 51  
Focus Mode ......................................................... 51 Focus Lock ............................................................ 56  
Focus Area Selection...................................... 53 The AF-Assist Illuminator............................. 58  
AF-Area Mode..................................................... 54 Getting Good Results with Autofocus 59  
Focus Zone Selection .................................... 55 Manual Focus...................................................... 60  
Exposure ............................................................................................................................................... 61  
Metering ................................................................ 61 Exposure Compensation............................. 72  
Exposure Mode.................................................. 62 Exposure and Flash Bracketing................ 73  
Autoexposure Lock ......................................... 70  
Flash Photography ............................................................................................................................ 76  
Flash Sync Modes............................................. 77 Flash Exposure Compensation ................ 80  
Using the Built-in Flash................................. 78 FV Lock.................................................................... 81  
Self-Timer Mode................................................................................................................................. 83  
Image Overlay and Multiple Exposure....................................................................................... 84  
Interval Timer Photography........................................................................................................... 89  
Non-CPU Lenses................................................................................................................................. 93  
Using a GPS Unit ................................................................................................................................ 96  
Two-Button Reset.............................................................................................................................. 97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
vi  
Reference: More on Playback ................................................................................ 98  
Viewing Photographs....................................................................................................................... 98  
Single-Image Playback.................................. 98 Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom.. 103  
Photo Information ........................................... 99 Protecting Photographs  
Viewing Multiple Images:  
from Deletion...................................................... 104  
Thumbnail Playback ....................................... 102 Deleting Individual Photographs........... 105  
Viewing Photographs on TV.......................................................................................................... 106  
Connecting to a Computer ............................................................................................................ 107  
Printing Photographs....................................................................................................................... 110  
Setup ........................................................................................................................................ 1115  
Basic Camera Settings: The Setup Menu................................................................................... 115  
Format..................................................................... 116 Auto Image Rotation...................................... 119  
LCD Brightness................................................... 116 Recent Settings.................................................. 119  
Mirror Lock-Up ................................................... 117 USB............................................................................ 121  
Video Mode.......................................................... 117 Dust Off Ref Photo........................................... 121  
World Time ........................................................... 117 Battery Info........................................................... 123  
Language .............................................................. 118 Firmware Version .............................................. 123  
Image Comment.............................................. 118  
Shooting Options: The Shooting Menu..................................................................................... 124  
Shooting Menu Bank ..................................... 125 RAW Compression........................................... 130  
Menu Reset .......................................................... 127 White Balance..................................................... 130  
Folders..................................................................... 128 Long Exp. NR ....................................................... 131  
File Naming.......................................................... 129 High ISO NR ......................................................... 131  
Optimize Image................................................. 129 ISO Sensitivity ..................................................... 132  
Color Space.......................................................... 129 Image Overlay.................................................... 132  
Image Quality ..................................................... 129 Multiple Exposure............................................ 132  
Image Size............................................................. 130 Interval Timer Shooting................................ 132  
JPEG Compression........................................... 130 Non-CPU Lens Data ........................................ 132  
Playback Options: The Playback Menu ...................................................................................... 133  
Delete ...................................................................... 133 Display Mode...................................................... 141  
Playback Folder.................................................. 135 Image Review..................................................... 141  
Slide Show............................................................ 135 After Delete.......................................................... 142  
Hide Image........................................................... 137 Rotate Tall.............................................................. 142  
Print Set .................................................................. 139  
Custom Settings................................................................................................................................. 143  
Technicaall NNoottes..................................................................................................................... 173  
Optional Accessories........................................................................................................................ 173  
Caring for the Camera...................................................................................................................... 184  
Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................................ 189  
Appendix .............................................................................................................................................. 195  
Specifications...................................................................................................................................... 203  
Index....................................................................................................................................................... 208  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
vii  
Take Test Shots  
Before taking pictures on important occasions (for example, at weddings or before taking  
the camera with you on a trip), take a test shot to ensure that the camera is functioning  
normally. Nikon will not be held liable for damages or lost profits that may result from  
product malfunction.  
Life-Long Learning  
As part of Nikon’s “Life-Long Learningcommitment to ongoing product support and edu-  
cation, continually-updated information is available on-line at the following sites:  
• For users in the U.S.A.: http://www.nikonusa.com/  
• For users in Europe and Africa: http://www.europe-nikon.com/support  
• For users in Asia, Oceania, and the Middle East: http://www.nikon-asia.com/  
Visit these sites to keep up-to-date with the latest product information, tips, answers to fre-  
quently-asked questions (FAQs), and general advice on digital imaging and photography.  
Additional information may be available from the Nikon representative in your area. See  
the URL below for contact information:  
http://nikonimaging.com/  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
viii  
Introduction  
Thank you for your purchase of a Nikon D200 single-lens reflex (SLR) digital camera  
with interchangeable lenses. This manual has been written to help you enjoy  
taking pictures with your Nikon digital camera. Read this manual thoroughly  
before use, and keep it handy when using the product. The documentation for  
this product also includes the manuals listed below. Please be sure to read all  
instructions thoroughly to get the most from the camera.  
Quick Start Guide: The Quick Start Guide takes you through the process of un-  
packing and setting up your Nikon digital camera, taking your first photographs,  
and transferring them to your computer.  
• Software manual (on CD): The software manual contains information on using  
the software provided with your camera. For information on viewing the soft-  
ware manual, see the Quick Start Guide.  
To make it easier to find the information you need, the following symbols and  
conventions are used:  
This icon marks cautions, information  
that should be read before use to pre-  
vent damage to the camera.  
This icon marks tips, additional infor-  
mation that may be helpful when us-  
ing the camera.  
This icon marks notes, information that  
should be read before using the cam-  
era.  
This icon indicates that more infor-  
mation is available elsewhere in this  
manual or in the Quick Start Guide.  
This icon marks settings that can be  
fi ne-tuned from the Custom Settings  
menu.  
This icon marks settings that can be ad-  
justed using camera menus.  
Lens  
An AF-S DX 18–70mm f/3.5–4.5G ED lens is used in this manual for illustrative purposes.  
The parts of the lens are shown below.  
Zoom ring  
Mounting index:  
8
Focal length scale  
CPU contacts: 176  
Focus ring: 60  
A-M mode switch: 60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
Getting to Know the Camera  
Take a few moments to familiarize yourself with camera controls and displays.  
You may find it helpful to bookmark this section and refer to it as you read  
through the rest of the manual.  
Camera Body  
Accessory shoe: 180  
Flash pop-up button: 78  
Built-in flash: 76  
(flash sync mode)  
button: 78  
[
Flash compensa-  
tion: 80]  
Flash sync terminal:  
180  
Eyelet for camera  
strap:  
9
10-pin remote  
terminal: 182  
Lens release button:  
8
Connector cover: 106  
Video connector: 106  
Focus-mode selector:  
19, 51  
DC-IN connector for optional  
EH-6 AC adapter: 181  
USB connector: 108, 111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
AF-assist illuminator: 58  
[Self-timer lamp: 83]  
[Red-eye reduction lamp: 77]  
Sub-command dial: 170  
Eyelet for camera strap:  
9
Depth-of-field preview button:  
62  
FUNC. button: 170  
Battery-chamber cover: 11  
Battery-chamber cover latch: 11  
Tripod socket  
Shutter-release button: 20  
(exposure mode)  
button: 62  
(format) button:  
14]  
Power switch: 17  
[Illuminator switch: 5]  
[
(exposure  
compensation)  
button: 72  
[(reset)  
QUAL (image quality/size)  
button: 29, 32  
[(reset) button: 97]  
button: 97]  
Mode dial lock  
release: 26  
Control panel:  
5
WB (white balance)  
button: 35–44  
(focal plane mark): 60  
Mode dial: 26 ISO (ISO sensitivity) button: 33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Camera Body (continued)  
Viewfinder eyepiece cup  
Viewfinder eyepiece:  
83, 90, 181  
Diopter adjustment control:  
16, 181  
(delete) button: 22, 105  
[
(format) button: 14]  
Metering selector: 61  
(AE/AF lock) button:  
(bracketing)  
56, 70  
button: 43, 73  
Main command  
(playback)  
dial: 170  
button: 22, 98  
(AF-ON)  
(menu)  
button: 52  
button: 24  
Focus selector  
lock: 53  
(thumbnail)  
button: 102  
Memory card  
(protect)  
button: 104  
[? (help) button:  
24]  
slot cover: 14  
Memory card  
access lamp:  
14  
(enter) button: 24  
AF-area mode selector: 54  
Card slot cover latch: 14  
[
(playback zoom)  
button: 103]  
Monitor: 9, 116, 184  
Multi selector  
The multi selector is used for menu navigation and to control the display of photo in-  
formation during playback.  
View more photo info Playback ( 98)  
Move cursor up  
Menu navigation ( 24)  
View previous photo  
Return to previous menu  
Cancel  
View next photo  
Display sub-menu  
Make selection  
Change number of  
images displayed  
Make selection  
View more photo info  
Move cursor down  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
Control Panel  
1
2
3
4
17  
16  
15  
8 Image quality........................................................28  
9 Focus area ...............................................................53  
AF-area mode.......................................................54  
10 White balance mode........................................35  
11 Number of exposures remaining .............17  
Number of shots remaining  
5
14  
6
7
13  
12  
11  
8
9
10  
1 Color temperature indicator........................38  
2 Shutter speed ..............................................62–69  
Exposure compensation value ..................72  
Flash compensation value............................80  
before memory buffer fills............................27  
PC mode indicator..........................................108  
Preset white balance recording  
indicator...................................................................40  
ISO sensitivity........................................................33 12 “K(appears when memory remains for  
White balance fine-tuning, color over 1000 exposures)......................................... 7  
temperature, or preset number .......37–42 13 Battery indicator..................................................17  
Number of shots in bracketing 14 Flash sync mode .................................................77  
sequence.................................................................73 15 “Beepindicator.................................................158  
Number of intervals..........................................91 16 Aperture (f/-number)..............................62–69  
Focal length (non-CPU lens)........................94  
3 Flash sync indicator...........................................79  
4 Flexible program indicator ...........................63  
5 Exposure mode....................................................62  
6 “Clock not setindicator ..............................117  
Aperture (number of stops).................67, 69  
Bracketing increment ..............................43, 73  
Number of shots per interval......................91  
Maximum aperture (non-CPU lens)........95  
PC connection indicator.............................108  
7 Image size ...............................................................32 17 Aperture stop indicator..........................67, 69  
18  
19  
20  
22 Image comment indicator.........................118  
23 Wide-frame focus area indicator...............56  
30  
29  
24 Custom menu bank.......................................146  
28  
25 Shooting menu bank....................................125  
26 Bracketing indicator..................................43, 73  
21  
22  
27  
26  
27 Electronic analog exposure display ........69  
Exposure compensation................................72  
Bracketing progress indicator.............43, 73  
25  
23  
24  
18 Flash compensation indicator....................80  
PC connection indicator.............................108  
19 Exposure compensation indicator ..........72 28 GPS connection indicator .............................96  
20 ISO sensitivity indicator ..................................33 29 Multiple exposure indicator.........................87  
21 Flash value (FV) lock..........................................81 30 Interval timer indicator ...................................91  
The LCD Illuminator  
Holding the power switch in the  
position activates the exposure meters and the  
control panel backlight (LCD illuminator), allowing the display to be read in the dark.  
After the power switch is released, the illuminator will remain active while the camera  
exposure meters are active or until the shutter is released.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
The Viewfinder Display  
When the battery is totally exhausted, the dis-  
play in the viewfinder will dim. The viewfinder  
display will return to normal when a fully-  
charged battery is inserted.  
1
2
6
3
4
5
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
22  
14 15 16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
23  
24  
1 Framing grid (displayed when On is  
14 Flash compensation indicator....................80  
selected for Custom Setting d2 (Grid  
15 Exposure compensation indicator ..........72  
Display)................................................................158 16 ISO sensitivity........................................................33  
2 8-mm (0.31-in.) reference circle for cen-  
ter-weighted metering ...................................61  
3 “No memory cardwarning*......................... 7  
4 Battery indicator*...............................................17  
5 Black-and-white indicator*..........................45  
6 Normal-frame focus brackets  
17 Number of exposures remaining .............17  
Number of shots remaining  
before memory buffer fills............................27  
Preset white balance recording  
indicator...................................................................40  
Exposure compensation value ..................72  
Flash compensation value............................80  
PC connection indicator.............................108  
(focus areas)...................................................53, 55  
7 Wide-frame focus brackets  
(focus areas)...........................................................55 18 Flash-ready indicator........................................79  
8 Focus indicator.....................................................20 19 Flash value (FV) lock..........................................81  
9 Metering...................................................................61 20 Flash sync indicator...........................................79  
10 Autoexposure (AE) lock ..................................70 21 Aperture stop indicator..........................67, 69  
11 Shutter speed ..............................................62–69 22 Electronic analog exposure display ........69  
12 Aperture (f/-number)..............................62–69  
Exposure compensation................................72  
Aperture (number of stops).................67, 69 23 Auto sensitivity indicator............................153  
13 Exposure mode....................................................62 24 “K(appears when memory remains for  
over 1000 exposures)......................................... 7  
* Can be hidden with Custom Setting d3 ( 158).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
Advanced Focusing Screen Display  
When the background is bright, the active focus area ( 53) is highlighted in black. When  
the background is dark, the active focus area is highlighted briefly in red as needed to  
establish contrast with the background (“Vari-Britefocus areas), making it easier to identify  
the selected focus area. The viewfinder is also equipped with on-demand grid lines. When  
On is selected for Custom Setting d2 (Grid display;  
158), a reference grid is superim-  
posed over the display in the viewfinder. This grid is a useful aid when composing land-  
scape shots or when tilting or shifting a PC Nikkor lens.  
Owing to the characteristics of this type of viewfinder display, you may notice fine lines  
radiating outwards from the selected focus area, or that the display in the viewfinder turns  
red when the selected focus area is highlighted. These phenomena are normal and do not  
indicate a malfunction.  
The Viewfinder Display  
The focus-area and grid-line displays in the viewfinder (advanced focusing screen display)  
tend to brighten at high temperatures and to darken and exhibit slower response times  
at low temperatures. The other displays in the viewfinder tend to darken at high tem-  
peratures and exhibit slower response times at low temperatures. All displays will return to  
normal at room temperature.  
Large-Capacity Memory Cards  
When enough memory remains on the memory card to  
record a thousand or more pictures at current settings, the  
number of exposures remaining will be shown in thou-  
sands, rounded down to the nearest hundred (e.g., if there  
is room for approximately 1,260 exposures, the exposure  
count display will show 1.2K).  
Camera Off Display/No Memory Card  
If the camera is turned off with a battery and memory card  
inserted, the number of exposures remaining will be dis-  
played in the control panel. If no memory card is inserted,  
the control panel will show  
played in the viewfinder.  
and a  
icon will be dis-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
First Steps  
Attaching a Lens  
Care should be taken to prevent dust from entering the camera when the lens  
is removed.  
After confirming that the camera is off, remove  
the rear lens cap and camera body cap.  
1
Keeping the mounting index on the lens  
aligned with the mounting index on the camera  
body, position the lens in the camera’s bayonet  
mount. Being careful not to press the lens-re-  
lease button, rotate the lens counter-clockwise  
until it clicks into place.  
Mounting  
index  
2
Detaching Lenses  
Be sure the camera is off when removing or exchanging  
lenses. To remove the lens, press and hold the lens-release  
button while turning the lens clockwise.  
Aperture Ring  
If the lens is equipped with an aperture ring, lock aperture at the minimum setting (highest  
f/-number). See the lens manual for details.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8
Attaching the Camera Strap  
Attach the strap as shown below.  
The Monitor Cover  
A clear plastic cover (the BM-6 LCD monitor cover) is pro-  
vided with the camera to keep the monitor clean and  
protect it when the camera is not in use. To attach the  
cover, insert the projection on the top of the cover into  
the matching indentation above the camera monitor ( ),  
then press the bottom of the cover until it clicks into place  
(
).  
To remove the cover, hold the camera firmly and pull the  
bottom of the cover gently outwards as shown at right.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9
Charging and Inserting the Battery  
The supplied EN-EL3e battery is not charged at shipment. Charge the battery us-  
ing the supplied MH-18a quick charger as described below.  
Charge the battery  
1
1.1 Connect the power cord to the charger and  
plug it in.  
1.2 Place the battery in the charger. The CHARGE  
lamp will blink as the battery charges. About  
two and a quarter hours are required for an  
exhausted battery to fully charge.  
1.3 Charging is complete when the CHARGE  
lamp stops blinking. Remove the battery  
from the charger and unplug the charger.  
The Battery and Charger  
Read and follow the warnings and cautions on pages ii–iii and 187–188 of this manual,  
together with any warnings and instructions provided by the battery manufacturer. Use  
only EN-EL3e batteries. The D200 is not compatible with the EN-EL3 or EN-EL3a batteries  
available for D100, D70-series, or D50 cameras or with the MS-D70 CR2 battery holder.  
Do not use the battery at ambient temperatures below 0°C (32°F) or above 40°C (104°F).  
During charging, the temperature should be in the vicinity of 5–35°C (41–95°F). Note that  
the battery may become hot during use; wait for the battery to cool before charging. Fail-  
ure to observe these precautions could damage the battery, impair its performance, or  
prevent it from charging normally.  
The supplied power cable is intended solely for use with the MH-18a and is for domestic  
use only. It may be necessary to purchase another cable for use abroad; consult with a local  
Nikon-authorized retailer or service representative. Unplug the charger when not in use.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10  
Insert the battery  
2
2.1 After confirming that the camera is off, open  
the battery chamber cover.  
2.2 Insert a fully charged battery as shown at  
right. Close the battery chamber cover.  
EN-EL3e Rechargeable Li-ion Batteries  
The EN-EL3e shares information with compatible devices, enabling the battery charge  
state to be shown in six levels in the control panel and as a percentage in the setup  
menu Battery Info display ( 123), together with battery life and the number of pic-  
tures taken since the battery was last charged.  
Use Only Nikon Brand Electronic Accessories  
Nikon cameras are designed to the highest standards and include complex electronic  
circuitry. Only Nikon brand electronic accessories (including lenses, Speedlights, battery  
chargers, batteries, and AC adapters) certified by Nikon specifically for use with this Nikon  
digital camera are engineered and proven to operate within the operational and safety  
requirements of this electronic circuitry.  
THE USE OF NON-NIKON ELECTRONIC ACCESSORIES COULD DAMAGE THE CAM-  
ERA AND MAY VOID YOUR NIKON WARRANTY. The use of third-party  
rechargeable Li-ion batteries not bearing the Nikon holo-  
graphic seal (see right) could interfere with normal opera-  
tion of the camera or result in the batteries overheating,  
igniting, rupturing, or leaking.  
For more information about Nikon brand accessories, contact an authorized Nikon dealer.  
Removing the Battery  
Turn the camera off before removing the battery. Replace the terminal cover when the  
battery is not in use.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11  
Basic Setup  
The language option in the setup menu is automatically highlighted the first  
time menus are displayed. Choose a language and set the time and date.  
1
3
5
7
9
2
4
6
8
Turn camera on and press button.  
Display language menu.  
Return to setup menu.  
Select language.  
Highlight World Time.  
Highlight Time Zone.  
Display options.  
Display map of world time zones.  
10  
Select local time zone.*  
Return to WORLD TIME menu.  
* UTC field shows time difference between selected time zone and Coordinated Universal  
Time (UTC), in hours.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12  
11  
12  
Highlight Date.†  
Display DATE menu.  
† If daylight saving time is in effect in local time zone, highlight Daylight Saving Time  
and press multi selector right. Press multi selector down to highlight On and press multi  
selector right. Time will automatically be advanced one hour.  
Press multi selector left or right to select  
item, up or down to change.  
13  
14  
16  
18  
15  
17  
Return to WORLD TIME menu.  
Highlight Date Format.  
Display options.  
Choose order in which date is displayed.  
19  
Return to WORLD TIME menu.  
Return to setup menu.  
Using Camera Menus  
The language option is only highlighted automatically the first time menus are displayed.  
SeeUsing Camera Menus( 24–25) for information on normal menu operation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13  
Inserting Memory Cards  
Photographs are stored on CompactFlash memory cards (available separately).  
Insert a memory card  
1
1.1 Turn the camera off before inserting or re-  
moving memory cards. Unlatch ( ) and  
open ( ) the memory card cover.  
2
1
1.2 Insert the card as shown at right. The eject  
button will pop up and the memory card  
access lamp will light for about a second.  
Close the memory card slot cover.  
Front  
Inserting Memory Cards  
Direction of  
insertion  
Front  
Confirm that the memory card is in the orienta-  
tion shown. Attempting to insert cards upside  
down or backward could damage the camera or  
card. Do not use force.  
Terminals  
Format the memory card  
2
Formatting memory cards permanently deletes all photographs and other  
data they may contain. Be sure all data you wish to keep have been copied  
to another storage device before formatting the card.  
2.1  
2.2  
Turn camera on and press  
and ) buttons simultaneously for  
about 2seconds until blinks in  
control panel and viewfinder.  
(
Press  
buttons again.* Do not  
turn camera off or remove battery  
or memory card until formatting is  
complete and control panel shows  
number of exposures remaining.  
* Press any other button to exit without formatting memory card.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14  
Removing Memory Cards  
1 Confirm that the access lamp is off.  
2 Turn the camera off and open the memory card slot cover.  
3 Press the eject button to partially eject the card ( ). The  
2
card can then be removed by hand ( ). Do not push on  
the memory card while pressing the eject button. Failure  
to observe this precaution could damage the camera or  
memory card.  
1
Illustrations  
In illustrations throughout this manual, indicators in the control panel and viewfinder rel-  
evant to the explanation in the accompanying text are shown in black. Indicators not  
mentioned in the text are shown in gray.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15  
Adjusting Viewfinder Focus  
Photographs are framed in the viewfinder. Before shooting, make sure that the  
display in the viewfinder is in clear focus.  
Remove the lens cap and turn the camera on.  
1
Rotate the diopter adjustment control until the  
focus brackets are displayed in sharp focus when  
the shutter-release button is pressed halfway.  
When operating the diopter adjustment control  
with your eye to the viewfinder, be careful not to  
put your fingers or fingernails in your eye.  
2
Focus  
brackets  
Auto Meter-Off  
At default settings, the viewfinder display and the aperture and shutter-speed indicators  
in the control panel will turn off if no operations are performed for about six seconds  
(auto meter-o), reducing the drain on the battery. Press the shutter-release button  
halfway to reactivate the display.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
16  
Tutorial:  
Photography and Playback  
Basic Photography  
This section describes how to take pictures at default settings.  
Turn the camera on  
1
1.1 Remove the lens cap and turn the camera  
on. The control panel will turn on and the  
display in the viewfinder will light. The mon-  
itor remains off during shooting.  
1.2 Check the battery level in the viewfinder or  
control panel.  
Control View-  
panel fi nder  
Description  
Battery fully charged.  
Battery partially discharged.  
Low battery. Ready fully-charged  
spare battery.  
Shutter-release disabled. Change  
(blinks) (blinks) battery.  
Battery level is not displayed when camera is powered by optional AC adapter.  
1.3 The exposure count displays in the control  
panel and viewfinder show the number  
of photographs that can be stored on the  
memory card. Check the number of expo-  
sures remaining.  
If there is not enough memory to store ad-  
ditional photographs at current settings,  
the display will flash as shown at right. No  
further pictures can be taken until the mem-  
ory card has been replaced or pictures have  
been deleted.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17  
Adjust camera settings  
2
This tutorial describes how to take photographs at the default settings listed  
in the table below, using a type G or D lens. See the “Reference” section for  
information on when and how to change settings from their default values.  
Control panel  
Viewfinder  
Exposure  
mode  
ISO sensitivity  
Image size  
Image  
quality  
White balance  
Focus area  
Option  
Image  
Default  
NORM  
Description  
Balance between image quality and file size is 28–  
quality  
Image  
size  
(JPEG Normal) ideal for snapshots.  
31  
L
Images are 3,872×2,592 pixels in size.  
32  
(Large)  
ISO  
ISO sensitivity (digital equivalent of film speed) 33–  
100  
sensitivity  
White  
balance  
set to value roughly equivalent to ISO 100.  
34  
A
White balance automatically adjusted for natu- 35–  
(Auto)  
ral coloration under most types of lighting.  
Built-in exposure program automatically adjusts  
shutter speed and aperture for optimal expo-  
sure in most situations.  
44  
Exposure  
mode (Programmed auto)  
62–  
69  
Focus  
area  
Center focus area Camera focuses on subject in center focus area. 53  
2.1 Press the mode-dial lock release ( ) while  
1
turning the mode dial ( ) to S (single  
frame). At this setting, the camera will take  
one photograph each time the shutter-re-  
lease button is pressed.  
2
2.2 Rotate the AF-area mode selector until it  
clicks into place pointing to  
(single-area  
AF). At this setting, the camera will focus on  
the subject in the focus area selected by the  
user.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
18  
2.3 Rotate the focus-mode selector until it clicks  
into place pointing to S (single-servo auto-  
focus). At this setting, the camera will focus  
automatically when the shutter-release but-  
ton is pressed halfway. Pictures can only be  
taken when the camera is in focus.  
2.4 Rotate the metering selector to  
(matrix  
metering). Matrix metering uses informa-  
tion from all areas of the frame to determine  
exposure, producing optimal results for the  
entire frame. A  
fi nder.  
icon appears in the view-  
Frame a photograph  
3
3.1 Hold the camera as shown.  
Holding the Camera  
Hold the handgrip in your right hand and cradle  
the camera body or lens with your left. Keep your  
elbows propped lightly against your torso for sup-  
port and place one foot half a pace ahead of the  
other to keep your upper body stable.  
3.2 Frame a photo in the viewfinder with the  
main subject positioned in the center focus  
area.  
Focus  
area  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
19  
Focus  
4
5
Press the shutter-release button halfway to focus.  
If the camera is able to focus on the subject in the  
center focus area, a beep will sound and the in-fo-  
cus indicator () will appear in the viewfinder (if  
the focus indicator blinks, the camera was unable  
to focus using autofocus). Focus will lock while  
the shutter-release button is pressed halfway.  
If the subject is dark, the AF-assist illuminator may  
light to assist the focus operation.  
Check exposure  
In exposure mode P (programmed auto), the  
camera automatically sets shutter speed and ap-  
erture when the shutter-release button is pressed  
halfway. Before shooting, check the shutter-  
speed and aperture indicators in the viewfinder.  
If the photo would be under- or over-exposed at  
current settings, one of the following indicators  
will be displayed.  
Indicator  
Description  
Photo will be overexposed. Use optional Neutral Density (ND) filter.  
Photo will be underexposed. Use flash or raise ISO sensitivity.  
The Shutter-Release Button  
The camera has a two stage shutter-release button. The camera focuses when the but-  
ton is pressed halfway; focus locks until the button is released. To take the picture, press  
the shutter-release button the rest of the way down.  
Lock focus  
Take  
photograph  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
20  
Take the photograph  
6
Smoothly press the shutter-release button the  
rest of the way down to release the shutter and  
record the photograph. The access lamp next  
to the card slot cover will light. Do not eject the  
memory card or remove or disconnect the power  
source until the lamp has gone out and recording  
is complete.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
21  
Basic Playback  
Press the button to view photographs. The most  
recent photo will be displayed in the monitor; addi-  
tional pictures can be displayed by pressing the multi  
selector left or right.  
To end playback and return to shooting mode, press  
the shutter-release button halfway.  
Deleting Unwanted Photographs  
To delete the photograph currently displayed in  
the monitor, press the  
button. A confirmation  
dialog will be displayed. Press the button again  
to delete the image and return to playback. To exit  
without deleting the picture, press the button or  
press the shutter-release button halfway.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
22  
Reference  
This section builds on the Tutorial to cover more advanced shooting and play-  
back options.  
Use the menus  
Using Camera Menus: 24  
Take photographs in bursts  
Reduce shutter lag  
Choosing a Shooting Mode: 26  
Adjust image quality and size  
Image Quality and Size: 28  
ISO Sensitivity: 33  
Raise ISO sensitivity when lighting is poor  
Make colors look natural  
White Balance: 35  
Take photos under unusual lighting  
Customize sharpening, contrast, color, satu-  
ration, and hue  
Optimizing Images: 45  
Choose a color space  
Color Space: 50  
Focus: 51  
Shoot a moving subject or focus manually  
Let the camera choose shutter speed and  
aperture  
Exposure Mode P  
(Programmed Auto): 63  
Freeze or blur motion  
Exposure Mode S  
(Shutter-Priority Auto): 64  
Control depth of field  
Exposure Mode A  
(Aperture-Priority Auto): 66  
Choose shutter speed and aperture manu-  
ally  
Exposure Mode M (Manual): 68  
Make photographs brighter or darker or en-  
hance contrast  
Exposure Compensation: 72  
Use the built-in flash  
Flash Photography: 76  
Self-Timer Mode: 83  
Take photos with the self-timer  
Superimpose photos on one another  
Take photos at specified intervals  
Use a non-CPU lens  
Image Overlay and Multiple Exposure: 84  
Interval-Timer Photography: 89  
Non-CPU Lenses: 93  
Record GPS data with photographs  
View photographs  
Using a GPS Unit: 96  
Viewing Photographs: 98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
23  
Using Camera Menus  
Most shooting, playback, and setup options can  
be accessed from the camera menus. To view the  
menus, press the button.  
Choose from playback, shoot-  
ing, Custom Settings, and  
setup menus (see below)  
Slider is displayed if more op-  
tions are available in current  
menu  
View recent settings  
Current setting for each op-  
tion is shown by icon  
If“?”icon is displayed, help for  
current item can be viewed  
by pressing button.  
Current menu item is high-  
lighted  
Menu  
Playback  
Shooting  
Description  
Adjust playback settings and manage photos ( 133).  
Adjust shooting settings ( 124).  
Custom Settings Personalize camera settings ( 143).  
Setup  
Format memory cards and perform basic camera setup ( 115).  
Lists the fourteen most recently used items in the shooting and  
Custom Settings menus.  
Recent Settings  
The multi selector is used to navigate through the camera menus.  
Move cursor up  
Increase number  
Display sub-menu  
Make selection (selection can also  
be made with button or center  
of multi selector)  
Return to previous menu  
Cancel (can also be performed  
with button)  
Move cursor down  
Decrease number  
Make selection (same as button)  
Help  
For help on menu options, press the button. A description of the currently selected  
option or menu will be displayed. To scroll the display, press the button while press-  
ing the multi selector up or down.  
Locking and Deleting Recent Settings  
The Recent Settings option in the setup menu ( 119) can be used to delete all  
items from the Recent Settings menu or to lock the menu at current settings, creating  
a customized menu of shooting and Custom Menu options.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
24  
To modify menu settings:  
1
2
Display menus  
Highlight icon for current menu  
3
Select menu  
4
5
7
Position cursor in selected menu  
Highlight menu item  
6
Display options  
Highlight option  
• Menu items that are displayed in gray are  
not currently available.  
8
• When formatting memory cards and in  
other cases in which user confirmation  
is required, a selection can only be made  
with the center of the multi selector or by  
pressing the button. A message to this  
effect will appear in the display.  
Make selection  
Exiting the Menus  
Press the shutter-release button halfway to exit the menus and return to shooting mode,  
or press the button once to highlight the icon for the current menu and again to exit to  
shooting mode.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
25  
Reference:  
More on Photography  
Choosing a Shooting Mode  
Shooting mode determines how the camera takes photographs: one at a time,  
in a continuous sequence, with a timed shutter-release delay, or with the mirror  
raised to enhance shutter response and minimize vibration.  
Mode  
Description  
Camera takes one photograph each time shutter-release button is pressed.  
Access lamp will light while photo is recorded; next shot can be taken im-  
mediately if enough space remains in memory buffer.  
S
Single frame  
CL  
While shutter-release button is held down, camera records 1–4 frames per  
Continuous second.* Frame rate can be chosen using Custom Setting d4 (Shooting  
low speed Speed; 158).  
CH  
While shutter-release button is held down, camera records up to 5 frames  
Continuous per second.* Use to photograph moving objects or to capture a fleeting  
high speed expression on portrait subjects.  
Use the self-timer for self-portraits or to reduce blurring caused by camera  
shake ( 83).  
Self-timer  
Press shutter-release button once to raise mirror, again to take photograph  
(shutter will be released automatically if shutter-release button is not  
pressed for 30s after mirror up). Mirror will be lowered after shutter is re-  
leased. Choose this mode to minimize camera shake in situations in which  
the least camera movement can result in blurred photographs. Note that  
autofocus, metering, and framing can not be confirmed in the viewfinder  
while mirror is raised.  
MUP  
Mirror up  
* Average frame rate with continuous-servo AF, manual or shutter-priority auto exposure, a  
shutter speed of /s or faster, and memory remaining in memory buffer.  
To choose a shooting mode, press the mode dial lock  
release and turn the mode dial to the desired set-  
ting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
26  
Buffer Size  
The number of images that can be stored in the memory  
buffer at current settings is shown in the exposure-count  
displays in the viewfinder and control panel while the  
shutter-release button is pressed (at image qualities of  
JPEG Fine, JPEG Normal, and JPEG Basic, the display  
will show 25 when the buffer contains space for 25 or  
more images). This number is updated as photographs are transferred to the memory  
card and more memory becomes available in the buffer. If 0 is displayed, the memory  
buffer is full and shooting will slow.  
Auto Image Rotation ( 119)  
In continuous mode, the orientation recorded for the first shot applies to all photographs in  
the same burst, even if camera orientation is changed during shooting.  
The Memory Buffer  
The camera is equipped with a memory buffer for temporary storage, allowing shooting  
to continue while photographs are being saved to the memory card. When the buffer is  
full, the shutter is disabled until enough data have been transferred to the memory card  
to make room for another photograph. In continuous mode, shooting will continue to a  
maximum of 100 shots as long as the shutter-release button is held down, although the  
frame rate will drop once the buffer has filled.  
While photographs are being recorded to the memory card, the access lamp next to the  
memory card slot will light. Depending on the number of images in the buffer, record-  
ing may take from a few seconds to a few minutes. Do not remove the memory card or  
remove or disconnect the power source until the access lamp has gone out. If the camera  
is switched off while data remain in the buffer, the power will not turn off until all images  
in the buffer have been recorded. To turn the camera off without recording the images in  
the buffer, press the button while turning the camera off (keep the button pressed for  
at least one second after turning the camera o). If the battery is exhausted while images  
remain in the buffer, the shutter release will be disabled and the images transferred to the  
memory card.  
The approximate time required to write the entire buffer to a 1GB SanDisk SDCFX (Extreme  
III) card is as follows (ISO sensitivity set to ISO 100 equivalent):  
Uncompressed NEF (RAW)+JPEG Basic (Large)  
Uncompressed NEF (RAW)  
50s (19 frames)  
50s (22 frames)  
35s (37 frames)  
JPEG Fine (Large)  
The buffer size shown in the control panel and viewfinder is an approximation only. The  
fi le size of compressed images varies with the scene recorded, producing variations in the  
number of images that can be stored. See the Appendix ( 196) for more information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
27  
Image Quality and Size  
Together, image quality and size determine how much space each photograph  
occupies on the memory card.  
Image Quality  
The camera supports the following image quality options (listed in descending  
order by image quality and file size):  
Mode  
Description  
Raw 12-bit data from the image sensor are saved directly to the memory  
card in Nikon Electronic Format (NEF).  
NEF (RAW)  
JPEG Fine Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1:4.*  
JPEG Normal Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1:8.*  
JPEG Basic Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1:16.*  
NEF (RAW) + Two images are recorded: one NEF (RAW) image and one fine-quality  
JPEG Fine JPEG image.  
NEF (RAW) + Two images are recorded: one NEF (RAW) image and one normal-quality  
JPEG Normal JPEG image.  
NEF (RAW) + Two images are recorded: one NEF (RAW) image and one basic-quality  
JPEG Basic JPEG image.  
* Size Priority selected for JPEG Compression ( 30).  
Image quality can be set using the Image Quality option in the shooting menu  
or by pressing the QUAL button and rotating the main command dial. Two op-  
tions are available for controlling compression: RAW Compression for NEF  
(RAW) images ( 31) and JPEG Compression for JPEG images ( 30).  
NEF (RAW)/NEF+JPEG  
NEF (RAW) images can only be viewed on a computer using the supplied software or Nikon  
Capture 4 Version 4.4 or later (available separately;  
182). When photographs taken at  
NEF (RAW) + JPEG Fine, NEF (RAW) + JPEG Normal, or NEF (RAW) + JPEG Basic are  
viewed on the camera, only the JPEG image will be displayed. When photographs taken at  
these settings are deleted, both NEF and JPEG images will be deleted.  
White balance bracketing can not be used with NEF (RAW) images. Selecting an NEF (RAW)  
option for image quality cancels white balance bracketing.  
Image Quality, Image Size, and File Size  
See the Appendix for information on the number of pictures that can be stored on a mem-  
ory card ( 196).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
28  
The Image Quality Menu  
Highlight Image Quality in the shooting menu  
and press the multi selector to the right.  
1
Highlight the desired option and press the multi  
selector to the right. The shooting menu will be  
displayed.  
2
The QUAL Button  
Press the QUAL button and rotate the main command  
dial until the desired setting is displayed in the con-  
trol panel (note that RAW Compression and JPEG  
Compression can only be adjusted from the shoot-  
ing menu).  
RAW  
FINE  
NORM  
BASIC  
RAW  
BASIC  
RAW  
NORM  
RAW  
FINE  
File Names  
Photographs are stored as image files with names of the form “DSC_nnnn.xxx,” where nnnn  
is a four-digit number between 0001 and 9999 assigned automatically in ascending order  
by the camera, and xxx is one of the following three letter extensions:NEFfor NEF images,  
“JPG” for JPEG images, and “NDF” for Dust Off ref photos ( 121–122). The NEF and JPEG  
fi les recorded at a setting of “NEF+JPEG” have the same file names but different exten-  
sions. Images recorded at a Color Space setting of AdobeRGB ( 50) have names that  
begin with an underscore (e.g.,_DSC0001.JPG”). TheDSCportion of the file name can be  
changed using the File Naming option in the shooting menu ( 129).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
29  
The JPEG Compression Menu  
The JPEG compression menu offers the following options for JPEG images:  
Mode  
Size Priority Images are compressed to produce relatively uniform file size. Quality  
(default) varies with scene recorded.  
Description  
Optimal Quality Optimal image quality. File size varies with scene recorded.  
The effects of these options are most pronounced with high ISO sensitivity ( 33),  
complex scenes, basic-quality JPEG images, or heavy sharpening ( 46).  
Highlight JPEG Compression in the shooting  
menu and press the multi selector to the right.  
1
Highlight the desired option and press the multi  
selector to the right. The shooting menu will  
be displayed. The selected option applies to all  
subsequent JPEG-quality images.  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
30  
The RAW Compression Menu  
The following options are available for NEF (RAW) images:  
Mode  
NEF (RAW)  
(default)  
Description  
NEF images are not compressed.  
Comp. NEF  
(RAW)  
NEF images are compressed by about 40–50% with little drop in qual-  
ity. Recording time is reduced.  
Highlight RAW Compression in the shooting  
menu and press the multi selector to the right.  
1
2
Highlight the desired option and press the multi  
selector to the right. The shooting menu will  
be displayed. The selected option applies to all  
subsequent NEF (RAW) images.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
31  
Image Size  
Image size is measured in pixels. Smaller sizes produce smaller files, making  
them suited to distribution via e-mail or inclusion in web pages. Conversely, the  
larger the image, the larger the size at which it can be printed without becoming  
noticeably “grainy. Choose image size according to the space available on the  
memory card and the task at hand.  
Image size  
Size (pixels) Approximate size when printed at 200 dpi  
Large (3872×2592/10.0 M)  
Medium (2896×1944/5.6 M)  
Small (1936×1296/2.5 M)  
3,872×2,592 49.2×32.9cm (19.36×12.96in.)  
2,896×1,944  
1,936×1,296  
36.8×24.7cm (14.48×9.72in.)  
24.6×16.5cm (9.68×6.48in.)  
Image size can be set using the Image Size option in the shooting menu or  
by pressing the QUAL button and rotating the sub-command dial. Note that the  
option selected does not affect the size of NEF (RAW) images. When viewed on  
a computer using the supplied software or Nikon Capture 4 Version 4.4 or later  
(available separately), NEF images are 3,872×2,592 pixels in size.  
The Image Size Menu  
Highlight Image Size in the shooting menu  
and press the multi selector to the right.  
1
Highlight the desired option and press the multi  
selector to the right. The shooting menu will be  
displayed.  
2
The QUAL Button  
Press the QUAL button and rotate the sub-command  
dial until the desired setting is displayed in the con-  
trol panel.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
32  
ISO Sensitivity  
“ISO sensitivity”is the digital equivalent of film speed. The higher the ISO sensitiv-  
ity, the less light needed to make an exposure, allowing higher shutter speeds or  
smaller apertures.  
ISO sensitivity can be set between values roughly equivalent to ISO 100 and ISO  
1600 in steps equivalent to /EV. Where high sensitivity is a priority, ISO sensi-  
tivity can be further increased up to 1EV over ISO 1600. ISO sensitivity can be  
adjusted using the ISO Sensitivity option in the shooting menu or by pressing  
the ISO button and rotating the main command dial.  
The ISO Sensitivity Menu  
Highlight ISO Sensitivity in the shooting menu  
and press the multi selector to the right.  
1
Highlight the desired option and press the multi  
selector to the right. The shooting menu will be  
displayed.  
2
The ISO Button  
Press the ISO button and rotate the main command  
dial until the desired setting is displayed in the con-  
trol panel or viewfinder.  
*
*
*
* Viewfinder display shows  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
33  
Noise  
The higher the ISO sensitivity, the more likely pictures are to be subject to“noise”in the form  
of randomly-spaced, brightly-colored pixels. Photos taken at ISO sensitivities over ISO 1600  
will likely contain appreciable amounts of noise.  
High ISO NR ( 131)  
This option can be used to reduce noise at ISO sensitivities of 400 or more (this reduces the  
capacity of the memory buffer). Note that although high ISO noise reduction is always in  
effect at ISO sensitivities over ISO 800, turning High ISO NR on will increase the amount of  
noise reduction performed.  
b1—ISO Auto ( 152)  
When On is selected for Custom Setting b1 (ISO Auto), the camera will automatically  
vary ISO sensitivity from the value selected by the user to help ensure optimum exposure  
(maximum can be selected from ISO 200, 400, 800, and 1600). ISO sensitivity can not be  
raised above 1600 while ISO Auto is on, and On can not be selected for ISO Auto at ISO  
sensitivities over 1600.  
b2—ISO Step Value ( 154)  
Depending on the option selected for Custom Setting b2, ISO sensitivity can also be set in  
increments equivalent to / or 1EV.  
ISO step value set to 1/2 step  
ISO step value set to 1 step  
If possible, the current ISO sensitivity setting is maintained when the step value is changed.  
If the current sensitivity setting is not available at the new step value, ISO sensitivity will be  
rounded up to the nearest available setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
34  
White Balance  
The color of light reflected from an object varies with the color of the light source.  
The human brain is able to adapt to changes in the color of the light source,  
with the result that white objects appear white whether seen in the shade, direct  
sunlight, or under incandescent lighting. Unlike the film used in film cameras,  
digital cameras can mimic this adjustment by processing images according to the  
color of the light source. This is known aswhite balance.” For natural coloration,  
choose a white balance setting that matches the light source before shooting.  
The following options are available:  
Approximate  
color  
Option  
temperature*  
Description  
White balance adjusted automatically using color tem-  
perature measured by 1,005-pixel RGB sensor and image  
sensor. For best results, use type G or D lens. With built-  
in flash or optional SB-800 and SB-600 Speedlights, white  
balance reflects conditions in effect when flash fires.  
3,500–  
8,000K  
Auto  
Incandescent  
Fluorescent  
Dir. Sunlight  
Flash  
Cloudy  
Shade  
3,000K Use under incandescent lighting.  
4,200K Use under fluorescent lighting.  
5,200K Use with subjects lit by direct sunlight.  
5,400K Use with built-in flash or optional Nikon flash units.  
6,000K Use in daylight under overcast skies.  
8,000K Use in daylight with subjects in the shade.  
Choose Color  
Temp.  
2,500–  
Choose color temperature from list of values ( 38).  
10,000K  
White Balance  
Preset  
Use gray or white object or existing photograph as  
reference for white balance ( 39).  
* Fine-tuning set to 0. See the Appendix for other values.  
Auto white balance is recommended with most light sources. If the desired re-  
sults can not be achieved with auto white balance, choose an option from the list  
above or use preset white balance.  
Studio Strobe Lighting  
Auto white balance may not produce the desired results with studio strobe lighting.  
Choose a color temperature, use preset white balance, or set white balance to Flash and  
use fine tuning to adjust white balance.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
35  
White balance can be set using the White Balance option in the shooting menu  
or by pressing the WB button and rotating the main command dial.  
The White Balance Menu  
Highlight White Balance in the shooting menu  
and press the multi selector to the right.  
1
Highlight the desired option and press the multi  
selector to the right. Selecting Choose Color  
Temp. displays a menu of color temperatures  
2
(
38), White Balance Preset a preset white  
balance menu ( 39), other options a fine-tun-  
ing dialog ( 37).  
The WB Button  
Press the WB button and rotate the main command  
dial until the desired setting is displayed in the con-  
trol panel.  
e5—Auto BKT Set ( 166)  
When WB Bracketing is selected for custom setting e5 (Auto BKT Set), the camera will  
create several images each time the shutter is released. White balance will be varied with  
each image, “bracketingthe value currently selected for white balance.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
36  
Fine-Tuning White Balance  
At settings other than (Choose Color Temp.) and PRE (White Balance Pre-  
set), white balance can be “fine tuned” to compensate for variations in the color  
of the light source or to introduce a deliberatewarmorcoldcast into an image.  
Higher settings (“+”) can be used to lend images a bluish tinge or to compensate  
for light sources with a yellow or red cast, while lowering white balance (“–”) can  
make photographs appear slightly more yellow or red or compensate for light  
sources with a blue cast. Adjustments can be made in the range +3 to –3 in  
increments of one. Except in Fluorescent mode, each increment is equivalent  
to about 10 mired.  
White balance is fine tuned using the White Balance option in the shooting  
menu or by pressing the WB button and rotating the sub-command dial. At set-  
tings other than 0, a  
icon appears in the control panel.  
The White Balance Menu  
Selecting an option other than Choose Color Temp.  
or White Balance Preset in the white balance menu  
(
35) displays the menu shown at right. Press the  
multi selector up or down to choose the desired  
value and press the multi selector to the right. The  
shooting menu will be displayed.  
The WB Button  
Press the WB button and rotate the sub-command  
dial until the desired value is displayed.  
Mired  
Any given change in color temperature produces a greater difference in color at low  
color temperatures than it would at higher color temperatures. For example, a change  
of 1000K produces a much greater change in color at 3000K than at 6000K. Mired,  
calculated by multiplying the inverse of the color temperature by 106, is a measure of  
color temperature that takes such variation into account, and as such is the unit used  
in color-temperature compensation filters. E.g.:  
• 4000K–3000K(a difference of 1000K)=83mired  
• 7000K–6000K(a difference of 1000K)=24mired  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
37  
Choosing a Color Temperature  
Choose a setting of  
(Choose Color Temp.) to select the color temperature  
from thirty-one predetermined values ranging from 2,500K to 10,000K in incre-  
ments of roughly 10 mired (note that the desired results will not be obtained  
with flash or fluorescent lighting). Color temperature can be selected in the  
white-balance menu or with the WB button and sub-command dial.  
The White Balance Menu  
Selecting Choose Color Temp. in the white balance  
menu ( 35) displays the menu shown at right. Press  
the multi selector up or down to choose the desired  
value and press the multi selector to the right. The  
shooting menu will be displayed.  
The WB Button  
Press the WB button and rotate the sub-command  
dial until the desired value is displayed.  
Take Test Shots  
Take a test shot to determine if the selected value is appropriate to the light source.  
Color Temperature  
The perceived color of a light source varies with the viewer and other conditions. Color  
temperature is an objective measure of the color of a light source, defined with reference  
to the temperature to which an object would have to be heated to radiate light in the same  
wavelengths. While light sources with a color temperature in the neighborhood of 5,000–  
5,500K appear white, light sources with a lower color temperature, such as incandescent  
light bulbs, appear slightly yellow or red. Light sources with a higher color temperature  
appear tinged with blue.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
38  
Preset White Balance  
Preset white balance is used to record and recall custom white balance settings  
for shooting under mixed lighting or to compensate for light sources with a  
strong color cast. Two methods are available for setting preset white balance:  
Method  
Description  
Direct  
Neutral gray or white object is placed under lighting that will be used in  
measurement fi nal photograph and white balance is measured by camera ( 40).  
Copy from White balance is copied from photo on memory card ( 42) or white bal-  
existing  
ance value is copied from Nikon Capture 4 Version 4.4 or later (available  
photograph separately; 182).  
The camera can store up to five values for preset white balance in presets d-0  
through d-4. A descriptive comment can be added to any white balance preset  
(
42).  
d-0  
d-1 – d-4  
Stores last  
measured  
Store values copied from d-0 (  
42).  
value ( 40).  
Store values cop-  
ied from images  
on memory card  
(
42).  
Store values created in Nikon Capture 4 Version 4.4 or  
later (available separately; 182).  
White Balance Presets  
Changes to white balance presets apply to all shooting menu banks ( 125). A confirma-  
tion dialog will be displayed if the user attempts to change a white balance preset created  
in another shooting menu bank (no warning is displayed for preset d-0).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
39  
Measuring a Value for White Balance  
White balance can be measured with reference to a neutral gray object. The new  
value for white balance is automatically stored in preset d-0.  
Place a neutral gray or white object under the lighting that will be used in  
the final photograph. A standard gray card can be used as a reference in  
studio settings.  
1
Press the WB button and rotate the main com-  
2
mand dial until  
is displayed in the control  
panel. If the new value for preset white balance  
will be used immediately, select preset d-0 by  
pressing the WB button and rotating the sub-  
command dial until d-0 is displayed. Otherwise  
there is no need to select d-0 when measuring a  
new value for white balance.  
Release the WB button briefly and then press the  
3
4
button until the  
icon starts to flash. A blink-  
ing will also appear in the control panel and  
viewfinder frame-count displays.  
Frame the reference object so that it fills the  
viewfinder and press the shutter-release button  
all the way down. The camera will measure a  
value for white balance and use this value when  
preset white balance is selected. No photograph will be recorded; white  
balance can be measured accurately even when the camera is not in fo-  
cus.  
To exit without measuring a new value for white balance, press the WB  
button.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
40  
If the camera was able to measure a value for  
5
white balance,  
will flash in the control  
panel and the viewfinder will show a flashing  
for about three seconds before the camera  
returns to shooting mode.  
If lighting is too dark or too bright, the camera  
may be unable to measure white balance.  
A
fl ashing will appear in the control panel  
and viewfinder for about three seconds. Return  
to Step 4 and measure white balance again.  
The new value for white balance will be stored in preset d-0, automatically replac-  
ing the previous value for this preset (no confirmation dialog will be displayed).  
To use the new value, select preset d-0 (if no value has been measured for white  
balance before d-0 is selected, white balance will be set to a color temperature of  
5,200K, the same as Direct Sunlight). The new white balance value will remain  
in preset d-0 until white balance is measured again. By copying preset d-0 to one  
of the other presets before measuring a new value for white balance, up to five  
white balance values can be stored ( 42).  
Nikon Capture 4  
Nikon Capture 4 Version 4.4 or later (available separately) can be used to edit white  
balance when RAW photographs taken with the D200 are displayed on a computer.  
The edited value can be copied directly to a white balance preset while the camera is  
connected to a computer, or the image can be saved to the camera memory card and  
the white balance value copied using the Select Image option in the preset menu.  
Any comments created with Nikon Capture 4 will also be copied to the comment for  
the selected preset. See the Nikon Capture 4 manual for details.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
41  
Preset White Balance Options  
Selecting White Balance Preset in the White Balance menu ( 35) displays  
the menu of white-balance presets shown in Step 1. To display options for a  
selected preset:  
1
2
Highlight desired preset.*  
View options for highlighted preset.†  
* To set white balance to the value for the highlighted preset and return to shooting mode  
without completing Step 2, press button.  
† To view options for other presets, highlight name of current preset (d-0–d-4) and press  
multi selector right.  
Press the multi selector up or down to highlight an option, then press to the right  
to select.  
Option  
Set  
Description  
Set white balance to value for selected preset and return to shooting  
menu.  
Edit  
Text edit dialog is displayed ( 118). Enter comment of up to 36 charac-  
Comment ters for current preset and press button to return to Step 1.  
Photos on memory card are displayed as thumbnail images. Use multi  
selector to highlight photos; press button to view highlighted photo  
Select Image  
full frame. Press center of multi selector to copy white balance value (and  
(d-1–d-4 only)  
comment, if any) for highlighted image to current preset and return to  
Step 1. Only photos taken with D200 can be selected.  
Copy d-0 Copy white balance value (and comment, if any) for preset d-0 to current  
(d-1–d-4 only) preset and return to Step 1.  
The WB Button  
At a setting of  
(White Balance Preset), presets can  
also be selected by pressing the WB button and rotating  
the sub-command dial. The current preset is displayed  
while the WB button is pressed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
42  
White Balance Bracketing  
White balance bracketing creates multiple images each time the shutter is re-  
leased, “bracketing” the current white balance setting ( 35). Only one shot  
is required to complete the bracketing sequence. White balance bracketing is  
recommended when shooting under mixed lighting or experimenting with dif-  
ferent white balance settings. White balance bracketing is not available at white-  
balance settings of  
(Choose Color Temp.) or  
(White Balance Preset)  
or at image qualities of NEF (RAW), NEF+JPEG Fine, NEF+JPEG Normal, or  
NEF+JPEG Basic.  
To use white balance bracketing:  
Choose WB Bracketing for Custom Setting e5  
(Auto BKT Set; 166).  
1
Pressing the  
mand dial to choose the number of shots in the  
bracketing sequence ( 197). At settings other  
than zero, a  
tor will appear in the control panel.  
button, rotate the main com-  
2
3
icon and bracketing indica-  
If the number of shots in the bracketing program  
exceeds the number of exposures remaining,  
(
) will be displayed and the number  
of exposures remaining will blink. Shooting can  
begin if a new memory card is inserted.  
Pressing the button, rotate the sub-command  
dial to choose the white balance adjustment (  
197). Each increment is roughly equivalent to 10  
mired.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
43  
Compose a photograph, focus, and shoot. Each shot will be processed to  
create the number of copies specified in the bracketing program, and each  
copy will have a different white balance. Modifications to white balance  
are added to the white balance adjustment made with white balance fine-  
tuning.  
4
To cancel bracketing, press the button and rotate the main command  
dial until the number of shots in the bracketing sequence is zero and  
white-balance bracketing indicator is no longer displayed in the control  
panel. The program last in effect will be restored the next time bracketing  
is activated. Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing a two-but-  
ton reset ( 97), although in this case the bracketing program will not be  
restored the next time bracketing is activated.  
Image Quality  
Selecting NEF (RAW), NEF+JPEG Fine, NEF+JPEG Normal, or NEF+JPEG Basic cancels  
white balance bracketing.  
Shooting Mode  
In all modes (including self-timer and continuous modes), only one shot will be taken each  
time the shutter-release button is pressed. Each shot will be processed to create the num-  
ber of copies specified in the bracketing program.  
Turning the Camera Off  
If the camera is turned off while the camera while the memory card access lamp is lit, the  
camera will power off only after all photographs in the sequence have been recorded. To  
turn the camera off without recording the remaining photographs, press the  
button  
while turning the camera off (keep the  
turning the camera o).  
button pressed for at least one second after  
Bracketing Programs  
See the Appendix for a list of white balance bracketing programs.  
e7—Auto BKT Order ( 167)  
This option can be used to change the bracketing order.  
e8—Auto BKT Selection ( 167)  
If desired, the main command dial can be used to turn bracketing on and off and the sub-  
command dial to select both the number of shots and the white-balance increment.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
44  
Optimizing Images  
The options in the Optimize Image menu can be used to optimize photographs  
according to how the picture will be used or the type of scene. Sharpening, con-  
trast, color reproduction, saturation, and hue can also be customized individually  
to match the user’s creative intent.  
Option  
Normal  
(default)  
Description  
N
SO  
VI  
Recommended for most situations.  
Softens outlines, producing natural images suitable for portraits  
or retouching on a computer.  
Enhances saturation, contrast, and sharpness to produce vivid  
images with vibrant reds, greens, and blues.  
Maximizes saturation, contrast, and sharpness to produce crisp  
images with sharp outlines.  
Softer  
Vivid  
VI  
More vivid  
Lowers contrast while lending natural texture and rounded feel  
to skin of portrait subjects.  
PO Portrait  
Customize sharpness, contrast, color reproduction, saturation,  
and hue ( 46).  
Custom  
BW  
Black-and-white Take photos in black-and-white.  
Black-and-white  
A B/W icon is displayed in the viewfinder when shooting in black-and-white ( 6).  
At Settings Other than Custom  
At settings other than Custom:  
• Photographs are optimized for current shooting conditions. Results will vary with ex-  
posure and the position of the subject in the frame, even in scenes of the same type.  
To take a series of photographs with identical image optimization, choose Custom and  
adjust settings individually, being sure not to select Auto for Image Sharpening, Tone  
Compensation, or Saturation.  
• Use a type G or D lens for best results.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
45  
To select an image optimization option:  
Highlight Optimize Image in the shooting  
menu ( 124) and press the multi selector to  
the right.  
1
Highlight the desired option and press the multi  
selector to the right. If Custom is selected, a  
menu of custom options will be displayed (  
49). In all other cases, the shooting menu will be  
displayed.  
2
Customizing Image Enhancement Options  
Select Custom to make separate adjustments to sharpening, contrast, color re-  
production, saturation, and hue.  
Making Edges More Distinct: Image Sharpening  
During shooting, the camera processes photographs to emphasize the borders  
between light and dark areas, making pictures appear sharper. Sharpening can  
be customized using the Image Sharpening menu.  
Option  
Description  
Camera automatically adjusts sharpening according to subject. Re-  
sults vary from shot to shot, even in scenes of same type; choose  
different setting to take multiple shots with same sharpening. For  
best results, use type G or D lens.  
Auto  
(default)  
Normal  
Low  
All images are sharpened by same standard amount.  
Images are sharpened less than standard amount.  
Medium Low Images are sharpened slightly less than standard amount.  
Medium High Images are sharpened slightly more than standard amount.  
High  
None  
Images are sharpened more than standard amount.  
Images are not sharpened.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
46  
Adjusting Contrast: Tone Compensation  
As photographs are saved to the memory card, they are processed to adjust the  
distribution of tones in the image, enhancing contrast. Tone compensation is  
performed by means of tone curves that define the relationship between the dis-  
tribution of tones in the original image and the compensated result. The Tone  
Compensation menu controls the type of curve used.  
Option  
Description  
Camera automatically optimizes contrast by selecting appropriate curve.  
Curve varies from shot to shot, even in scenes of same type; to take mul-  
Auto  
(default) tiple shots with same curve, choose different setting. For best results, use  
type G or D lens.  
Camera uses same standard curve for all images. Suited to most scenes,  
whether dark or bright.  
Normal  
Less  
Prevents highlights on portrait subjects from beingwashed out”in direct  
Contrast sunlight.  
More  
Contrast  
Preserves detail in misty landscapes and other low-contrast subjects.  
Custom curve can be created in Nikon Capture 4 Version 4.4 or later (avail-  
able separately) and downloaded to camera. Choose Custom to select  
this user-defined curve. If no custom curve has been created, this option  
is equivalent to Normal.  
Custom  
Suiting Colors to the Subject: Color Mode  
Much as film cameras offer a choice of films for different subjects, the D200 offers  
a choice of color modes with subtly different palettes.  
Option  
I
(default)  
Description  
Choose for portrait shots.  
Choose for photographs that will be extensively processed or retouched. This  
option is available only when AdobeRGB is selected for Color space.  
Choose for nature or landscape shots.  
II  
III  
Mode II  
If sRGB is chosen for Color space when Color mode is set to Mode II, Color mode will be  
reset to the mode in effect when sRGB was last selected.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
47  
Controlling Vividness: Saturation  
Saturation controls the vividness of colors.  
Description  
Option  
Camera automatically adjusts saturation according to subject. For best  
results, use type G or D lens.  
Auto  
Normal  
(default)  
Normal vividness. Recommended for most situations.  
Reduced vividness. Use when taking pictures that will later be re-  
touched by computer.  
Increased vividness. Use for vivid, photoprint effect when taking pic-  
tures that will be printedas is,without further modification.  
Moderate  
Enhanced  
Controlling Color: Hue Adjustment  
Hue can be adjusted in the range of about –9° to +9° in increments of 3°. If red  
is taken as the starting color, raising hue above 0° (the default setting) would  
introduce a yellow cast, making colors that would be red at a setting of 0° appear  
increasingly orange. Lowering hue below 0° would introduce a blue cast, mak-  
ing colors that would be red at a setting of 0° appear increasingly purple.  
Hue  
The RGB color model used in digital photographs reproduces colors using differing  
amounts of red, green, and blue light. By mixing two colors of light, a variety of different  
colors can be produced. For example, red combined with a small amount of green light  
produces orange. If red and green are mixed in equal amounts, yellow results, while  
a smaller amount of red produces a yellow green. Mixing different amounts of red  
and blue light produces colors ranging from a reddish purple through purple to navy,  
while mixing different amounts of green and blue light produces colors ranging from  
emerald to turquoise. (Adding a third color of light results in lighter hues; if all three  
are mixed in equal amounts, the results range from white through gray.) When this  
progression of hues is arranged in a circle, the result is known as a color wheel.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
48  
Choosing Custom Image Optimization Options  
Choosing Custom in the Optimize Image menu ( 45) displays the menu  
shown in Step 1.  
1
2
Highlight optimization option.  
Display sub-menu.  
3
4
Highlight option.  
Make selection. Repeat steps 1–4 to  
adjust other options.  
5
6
Highlight Done.  
Return to shooting menu.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
49  
Color Space  
The options in the Color Space menu determine the gamut of colors available  
for color reproduction. Choose a color space according to how photographs will  
be processed on leaving the camera.  
Option  
sRGB  
(default)  
Description  
Choose for photographs that will be printed or used “as is,” with no  
further modification. Color mode II is not available ( 47).  
This color space is capable of expressing a wider gamut of colors than  
AdobeRGB sRGB, making it the preferred choice for images that will be extensively  
processed or retouched.  
Highlight Color Space in the shooting menu  
and press the multi selector to the right.  
1
2
Highlight the desired option and press the multi  
selector to the right.  
Color Space  
sRGB is recommended when taking photographs that will be printed without modification  
or viewed in applications that do not support color management, or when taking photo-  
graphs that will be printed with ExifPrint, the direct printing option on some household  
printers, or kiosk printing or other commercial print services. Adobe RGB photographs can  
also be printed using these options, but colors will not be as vivid.  
JPEG photographs taken in the Adobe RGB color space are Exif 2.21 and DCF 2.0 compliant;  
applications and printers that support Exif 2.21 and DCF 2.0 will select the correct color  
space automatically. If the application or device does not support Exif 2.21 and DCF 2.0,  
select the appropriate color space manually. For more information, see the documentation  
provided with the application or device.  
Nikon Software  
Nikon Capture 4 Version 4.4 or later (available separately) and PictureProject automatically  
select the correct color space when opening photographs created with the D200.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
50  
Focus  
This section describes the options that control how your camera focuses: focus  
mode, focus-area selection, and AF-area mode.  
Focus Mode  
Focus mode is controlled by the focus mode selector  
on the front of the camera. There are two autofocus  
(AF) modes, in which the camera focuses automati-  
cally when the shutter-release button is pressed half-  
way, and one manual focus mode, in which focus  
must be adjusted manually using the focusing ring  
on the lens:  
Option  
Description  
Camera focuses when shutter-release button is pressed halfway. Focus  
locks when in-focus indicator () appears in viewfinder, and remains locked  
S
Single- while shutter-release button is pressed halfway (focus lock). At default set-  
servo AF tings, shutter can only be released when in-focus indicator is displayed (fo-  
cus priority).  
Camera focuses continuously while shutter-release button is pressed half-  
way. If subject moves, focus will be adjusted to compensate (predictive focus  
C
Continuous-  
servo AF  
tracking;  
52). At default settings, photographs can be taken whether or  
not camera is in focus (release priority).  
Camera does not focus automatically; focus must be adjusted manually us-  
ing the lens focusing ring. If maximum aperture of lens is f/5.6 or faster,  
viewfinder focus indicator can be used to confirm focus (electronic range  
fi nding), but photographs can be taken at any time, whether or not camera  
is in focus.  
M
Manual  
Choose single-servo AF when photographing stationary subjects. Continuous-  
servo AF may be a better choice with erratically-moving subjects. Manual focus  
is recommended when the camera is unable to focus using autofocus.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
51  
The AF-ON Button  
For the purpose of focusing the camera, pressing the AF-  
ON button has the same effect as pressing the shutter-re-  
lease button halfway.  
Predictive Focus Tracking  
In continuous-servo AF, the camera will automatically initiate predictive focus tracking if  
the subject moves while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway or the AF-ON but-  
ton is pressed. In predictive focus tracking, the camera will track focus while attempting  
to predict where the subject will be when the shutter is released.  
a1—AF-C Mode Priority ( 148)  
If Focus is selected for Custom Setting a1 (AF-C Mode Priority), photographs can be  
taken in continuous servo-AF only when the camera is in focus. Note that regardless of the  
setting selected, focus will not lock when the in-focus indicator is displayed.  
a2—AF-S Mode Priority ( 148)  
If Release is selected for Custom Setting a2 (AF-S Mode Priority), photographs can be  
taken in single servo-AF even when the camera is not in focus. Note that regardless of the  
setting selected, focus will lock when the in-focus indicator is displayed.  
a5—Lock-On ( 150)  
This option controls whether the camera immediately adjusts focus to track a subject when  
the distance to the subject changes drastically.  
a6—AF Activation ( 151)  
If AF-ON Only is selected for Custom Setting a6 (AF Activation), the camera will only  
focus when the AF-ON button is pressed, not when the shutter-release button is pressed  
halfway.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
52  
Focus Area Selection  
At default settings, the D200 offers a choice of eleven focus areas that together  
cover a wide area of the frame. The focus area can be selected manually, allow-  
ing photographs to be composed the main subject positioned almost anywhere  
in the frame, or automatically to ensure that the subject closest to the camera is  
always in focus regardless of where it is the frame (closest-subject priority; 54).  
Group dynamic-AF can be used to focus on the closest subject in a selected area  
of the frame ( 54).  
To select the focus area, rotate the focus selector lock  
to the ““ position. The multi selector can then be  
used to select the focus area.  
To select the center focus area (or focus area group)  
at any time, press the center of the multi selector.  
The focus selector lock can be rotated to the “L”  
(locked) position following selection to prevent the  
selected focus area from changing when the multi  
selector is pressed.  
Focus Area Selection  
The focus area can not be changed when the exposure meters are off, during playback, or  
while menus are displayed.  
a3—Focus Area Frame ( 148)  
In single-area ( ) and dynamic-area AF ( ), select Wide Frame (7 Areas) to choose  
from seven wide focus areas instead of the normal eleven ( 55–56).  
a7—AF Area Illumination ( 151)  
Depending on the option selected for Custom Setting a7 (AF Area Illumination), the ac-  
tive focus area will be highlighted briefly in red to improve contrast as needed (“Vari-Brite”  
focus areas), highlighted at all times, or never highlighted.  
a8—Focus Area ( 151)  
This option can be used to set focus area selection towrap around.”  
f1—Center Button > Shooting Mode ( 168)  
Depending on the option selected for Center Button >Shooting Mode (Custom Set-  
ting f1), pressing the center of the multi selector will have no effect or will illuminate the  
selected focus area.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
53  
AF-Area Mode  
AF-area mode determines how the focus area is  
selected in autofocus mode. To select the AF-area  
mode, rotate the AF-area mode selector. The select-  
ed mode is shown by an icon in the control panel  
(see below).  
Mode  
Icon  
Description  
User selects focus area using multi selector; camera focuses on  
subject in selected focus area only. Use for relatively static com-  
positions with subjects that will stay in selected focus area.  
User selects focus area manually, but camera uses information  
from multiple focus areas to determine focus. If subject leaves  
selected focus area even briefly, camera will focus based on infor-  
mation from other focus areas (focus area selected in viewfinder  
does not change). Use with continuous-servo AF to follow er-  
ratically moving subjects and in other situations in which it is dif-  
fi cult to keep subject in selected focus area.  
Single-area AF  
Dynamic-area  
AF  
User chooses focus area group (see  
right). Camera focuses on center  
Top  
of selected group; if subject leaves  
focus area even briefly, camera fo-  
cuses based on information from  
other focus areas in same group.  
Use when subject is moving errati-  
cally but place of subject in overall  
composition is known. Custom  
Left  
Center Right  
Bottom  
Group  
dynamic- AF  
Setting a4 ( 149) can be used to change how focus areas are  
grouped or to focus on closest subject in selected group.  
Camera automatically selects focus area containing subject clos-  
est to camera. Prevents out-of-focus shots when photograph-  
ing erratically moving subjects. Focus area can not be selected  
manually and is not displayed in viewfinder or control panel.  
Dynamic-area  
AF with closest  
subject priority  
Manual Focus  
Single-area AF is automatically selected when manual focus is used.  
The Control Panel  
The selected focus area or group of focus areas is shown in the control panel in single-area  
AF, dynamic-area AF, and group dynamic-AF. The illustrations in the “Icon” column show  
the display when the center focus area or focus area group is selected. The control panel  
display does not show the focus area selected by the camera for dynamic-area AF with  
closest subject priority.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
54  
Focus Zone Selection  
When  
54), the user can select from normal or wide focus areas (only normal focus  
areas are available when group dynamic-area or closest subject priority  
(single-area AF) or  
(dynamic-area AF) is selected for AF-area mode  
(
AF is selected for AF-area mode).  
Option  
Description  
Normal Frame  
(11 Areas)  
User can select from eleven focus areas; camera focuses on selected fo-  
cus area. Use to focus on specific areas of subject.  
(default)  
User can select from seven focus areas each covering wide area of  
Wide Frame frame, making it easier to position subject in focus area and reducing  
(7 Areas)  
time needed to frame photographs. May produce unpredictable results  
if focus area contains multiple subjects.  
Focus areas are displayed in the control panel and viewfinder as follows:  
Control panel  
Single-area AF  
Dynamic-area AF  
Viewfi nder  
Normal Frame  
(11 Areas)  
Wide Frame  
(7 Areas)  
To choose focus zone size using Custom Setting a3 (Focus Area Frame), display  
the Custom Settings menu and follow the steps below.  
1
2
Highlight Autofocus.  
Display options.  
3
4
Highlight a3 Focus Area Frame.  
Display options.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
55  
5
6
Highlight option.  
Make selection.  
To choose focus zone size using the FUNC. button and sub-command dial:  
Select Focus Area Frame for Custom Setting f4  
(FUNC. Button; 170).  
1
Press the FUNC. button and rotate the sub-com-  
mand dial. Wide focus zones are used when  
WIDE is displayed in the control panel.  
2
Focus Lock  
Focus lock can be used to change the composition after focusing, making it pos-  
sible to focus on a subject that will not be in a focus area in the final composition.  
It can also be used when the autofocus system is unable to focus ( 59).  
In single-servo AF, focus locks automatically when the in-focus indicator () ap-  
pears in the viewfinder. In continuous-servo AF, focus must be locked manually  
using the AE-L/AF-L button. To recompose a photograph using focus lock:  
Position the subject in the selected focus area  
and press the shutter-release button halfway to  
initiate focus.  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
56  
Check that the in-focus indicator () appears in the viewfinder.  
2
3
Single-servo AF  
Focus will lock automatically when the in-focus  
indicator appears, and remain locked until you  
remove your finger from the shutter-release  
button. Focus can also be locked by pressing  
the AE-L/AF-L button (see below).  
Continuous-servo AF  
Press the AE-L/AF-L button to lock both focus and  
exposure. Focus will remain locked while the AE-  
L/AF-L button is pressed, even if you later remove  
your finger from the shutter-release button.  
Recompose the photograph and shoot.  
In single-servo AF, focus will remain locked between shots as long as the shut-  
ter-release button is kept pressed halfway, allowing several photographs in suc-  
cession to be taken at the same focus setting. Focus will also remain locked  
between shots while the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed.  
Do not change the distance between the camera and the subject while focus  
lock is in effect. If the subject moves, focus again at the new distance.  
c2—AE-L/AF-L ( 156)  
This option controls whether the AE-L/AF-L button locks focus and exposure (the default  
setting), focus only, or exposure only.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
57  
The AF-Assist Illuminator  
The built-in AF assist illuminator enables the camera  
to focus even when the subject is poorly lit. The cam-  
era must be in focus mode S (single-servo autofocus),  
an AF-Nikkor lens must be attached, and the center  
focus area or focus area group must be selected or  
closest subject priority in effect. If these conditions are met and the subject is  
poorly lit, the illuminator will light automatically to assist the autofocus operation  
when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway.  
For the AF-assist illuminator to function correctly, the lens must have a focal  
length of 24–200mm and the subject must be in range of the illuminator. Lens  
hoods should be removed. With most lenses, the illuminator has a range of about  
0.5–3m (1ft. 8in.–9ft. 10in.). With the following lenses, autofocus with AF-assist  
illumination is not available at ranges under 0.7m (2ft. 4in.):  
• AF Micro ED 200mm f/4D  
• AF-S VR ED 24–120mm f/3.5–5.6G  
• AF-S ED 28–70mm f/2.8D  
• AF Micro ED 70–180mm f/4.5–5.6D  
With the following lens, AF assist is not available at ranges under 1m (3ft. 3in.):  
• AF-S DX ED 55–200mm f/4–5.6G  
With the following lenses, AF assist is not available at ranges under 1.5m (4ft. 11in.):  
• AF-S VR ED 70–200mm f/2.8G  
• AF ED 80–200mm f/2.8D  
• AF-S ED 80–200mm f/2.8D  
With the following lens, AF assist is not available at ranges under 2.5m (8ft. 2in.):  
• AF VR ED 80–400mm f/4.5–5.6D  
AF assist is not available with the AF-S VR ED 200–400mm f/4G.  
Continuous Use of the AF-Assist Illuminator  
After the AF-assist illuminator has been used for several consecutive shots, it may turn off  
briefly to protect the lamp. The illuminator can be used again after a short pause. Note that  
the illuminator may become hot with continuous use.  
a9—AF Assist ( 152)  
This option can be used to turn AF-assist illumination off.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
58  
Under the conditions described above, the optional SB-800 and SB-600 Speed-  
lights and SU-800 wireless Speedlight commander will provide active AF illumi-  
nation for the following focus areas:  
AF lens focal length  
Normal frame (11 areas)  
Wide frame (7 areas)  
23–34mm  
35–70mm  
71–105mm  
With other Speedlights, the camera AF assist illuminator will be used.  
Getting Good Results with Autofocus  
Autofocus does not perform well under the conditions listed below. If the cam-  
era is unable to focus using autofocus, use manual focus ( 60) or use focus lock  
(
56) to focus on another subject at the same distance and then recompose  
the photograph.  
There is little or no  
contrast between  
the subject and the  
background  
The focus area  
contains objects at  
different distances  
from the camera  
Example: subject is the same color as the Example: subject is inside a cage.  
background.  
The subject is dom-  
inated by regular  
geometric patterns  
The focus area  
contains areas of  
sharply contrasting  
brightness  
Example: a row of windows in a skyscraper. Example: subject is half in the shade.  
The subject appears  
smaller than the  
focus area  
The subject many  
contains fine details  
Example: focus area contains both fore- Example: a field of flowers or other subjects  
ground subject and distant buildings. that are small or lack variation in brightness.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
59  
Manual Focus  
Manual focus is available for lenses that do not sup-  
port autofocus (non-AF Nikkor lenses) or when auto-  
focus does not produce the desired results ( 59).  
To focus manually, set the focus-mode selector to M  
and adjust the lens focusing ring until the image dis-  
played on the clear matte field in the viewfinder is in  
focus. Photographs can be taken at any time, even  
when the image is not in focus.  
The Electronic Range Finder  
If the lens has a maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster,  
the viewfinder focus indicator can be used to confirm  
whether the portion of the subject in the selected fo-  
cus area is in focus. After positioning the subject in  
the active focus area, press the shutter-release button  
halfway and rotate the lens focusing ring until the in-  
focus indicator () is displayed.  
Focal Plane Position  
To determine the distance between your subject and the  
camera, measure from the focal plane mark on the cam-  
era body. The distance between the lens mounting flange  
and the focal plane is 46.5mm (1.83in.).  
A-M Selection/Autofocus with Manual Priority  
When using a lens that offers A-M selection, select M when focusing manually. With lenses  
that support M/A (autofocus with manual priority), focus can be adjusted manually with  
the lens set to M or M/A. See the documentation provided with your lens for details.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
60  
Exposure  
Metering  
The metering method determines how the camera sets exposure:  
Method  
Description  
1,005-pixel RGB sensor sets exposure based on variety of information from all  
areas of frame. With type G or D lens, camera uses 3D color matrix metering II  
for natural results even when frame is dominated by bright (white or yellow)  
or dark (black or dark green) colors. With other CPU lenses, 3D range informa-  
tion is not included; instead, camera uses color matrix metering II. Color matrix  
metering is available when focal length and maximum aperture of non-CPU lens  
are specified using Non-CPU Lens Data item in shooting menu ( 93; center-  
weighted metering is used if focal length or aperture is not specified). Matrix  
metering will not produce desired results with autoexposure lock ( 70) or ex-  
posure compensation ( 72), but is recommended in most other situations.  
Camera meters entire frame but assigns greatest weight to area in center of  
frame 8mm (0.31in.) in diameter, shown by corresponding 8-mm reference  
circle in viewfinder. Classic meter for portraits; recommended when using fil-  
ters with an exposure factor (filter factor) over 1× ( 181).*  
3D color  
matrix II/  
Color  
matrix II/  
Color  
matrix  
Center-  
weighted  
Camera meters circle 3mm (0.12in.) in diameter (approximately 2.0% of frame).  
Circle is centered on current focus area (in group dynamic AF, on center focus  
area of current group; 54), making it possible to meter off-center subjects (if  
non-CPU lens is used or if dynamic-area AF with closest subject priority is in ef-  
fect, camera will meter center focus area). Ensures that subject will be correctly  
exposed, even when background is much brighter or darker.*  
Spot  
* For improved precision with non-CPU lenses, specify lens focal length and maximum  
aperture in Non-CPU Lens Data menu ( 93).  
Before shooting, rotate the metering selector to  
choose a method suited to the composition and  
lighting conditions, and confirm your selection in the  
viewfinder.  
b6—Center Weight ( 155)  
This option controls the size of the area assigned the greatest weight in center-weighted  
metering.  
b7—Fine Tune Exposure ( 156)  
Optimal exposure can be fine-tuned separately for each metering method (note that the  
exposure compensation icon is not displayed when exposure is fine-tuned).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
61  
Exposure Mode  
Exposure mode determines how the camera sets shutter speed and aperture  
when adjusting exposure. Four modes are available: programmed auto (P), shut-  
ter-priority auto (S), aperture-priority auto (A), and manual (M).  
Depth-of-Field Preview  
To preview the effects of aperture, press and hold the  
depth-of-field preview button. The lens will be stopped  
down to the aperture value selected by the camera  
(modes P and S) or the value chosen by the user (modes  
A and M), allowing depth of field to be previewed in the  
viewfinder (the built-in flash and optional SB-800, SB-600,  
and SB-R200 Speedlights will emit a modeling flash).  
CPU Lenses  
When using a CPU lens equipped with an aperture ring, lock the aperture ring at the min-  
imum aperture (highest f/-number). At other settings, the shutter release will be disabled  
and a blinking  
will appear in the aperture displays in the control panel and viewfinder.  
Type G lenses are not equipped with an aperture ring.  
b1—ISO Auto ( 152)  
When Custom Setting b1 (ISO Auto) is on, the camera automatically varies ISO sensitivity  
between ISO 100 and a maximum selected by the user to help ensure optimum exposure  
and flash level. In exposure modes P and A, the camera adjusts ISO sensitivity when the  
shutter speed needed to obtain optimum exposure would be faster than /s or slower  
than a specified value. Otherwise the camera adjusts ISO sensitivity when the limits of the  
camera exposure metering system are exceeded (mode S) or when optimum exposure can  
not be achieved at the shutter-speed and aperture selected by the user (mode M).  
e4—Modeling Flash ( 166)  
If Off is selected for Custom Setting e4 (Modeling Flash), the built-in flash and optional  
SB-800, SB-600, and SB-R200 Nikon Speedlights will not emit a modeling flash when the  
depth-of-field preview button is pressed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
62  
P: Programmed Auto  
In this mode, the camera automatically adjusts shutter speed and aperture ac-  
cording to a built-in program ( 195) for optimal exposure in most situations.  
This mode is recommended for snapshots and other situations in which you want  
to leave the camera in charge of shutter speed and aperture. Adjustments can  
be made using flexible program, exposure compensation ( 72), and auto ex-  
posure bracketing ( 73). Programmed auto is only available with CPU lenses.  
To take photographs in programmed auto:  
Press the  
button and rotate the main com-  
1
2
mand dial until P is displayed in the viewfinder  
and control panel.  
Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.  
Flexible Program  
In mode P, different combinations of shutter speed and  
aperture can be selected by rotating the main command  
dial (“flexible program”). All combinations produce the  
same exposure. While flexible program is in effect, an as-  
terisk (“*”) appears next to the exposure-mode indicator in the control panel. To restore  
default shutter speed and aperture settings, rotate the main command dial until the  
indicator is no longer displayed. Default settings can also be restored by turning the  
camera off, selecting another exposure mode, performing a two-button reset ( 97),  
or choosing another setting for Custom Setting b3 (EV Step; 154).  
Non-CPU Lenses  
Exposure mode A (aperture-priority auto) is automatically selected when a non-CPU lens  
is attached. The exposure mode indicator (P) will blink in the control panel and A will be  
displayed in the viewfinder. For more information, seeAperture-Priority Auto( 66).  
Exposure Warning  
If the limits of the exposure metering system are exceeded, one of the following indicators  
will be displayed in the control panel and viewfinder:  
Indicator  
Description  
Subject too bright. Use optional Neutral Density (ND) filter or lower ISO sensitivity ( 33).  
Subject too dark. Use flash or raise ISO sensitivity ( 33).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
63  
S: Shutter-Priority Auto  
In shutter-priority auto, you choose the shutter speed while the camera auto-  
matically selects the aperture that will produce the optimal exposure. Shutter  
speed can be set to values between 30s and /s. Use slow shutter speeds to  
suggest motion by blurring moving objects, high shutter speeds to “freeze” mo-  
tion. Shutter-priority auto is only available with CPU lenses.  
To take photographs in shutter-priority auto:  
Press the  
button and rotate the main com-  
1
mand dial until S is displayed in the viewfinder  
and control panel.  
Rotate the main command dial to choose the  
desired shutter speed.  
2
3
Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
64  
Non-CPU Lenses  
Exposure mode A (aperture-priority auto) is automatically selected when a non-CPU lens  
is attached. The exposure mode indicator (S) will blink in the control panel and A will be  
displayed in the viewfinder.  
Changing from Mode M to Mode S  
If you select a shutter speed of  
in mode M and then select mode S without changing  
the shutter speed, the shutter-speed display will flash and the shutter can not be released.  
Rotate the main command dial to select a different shutter speed before shooting.  
Exposure Warning  
If the camera is unable to produce the correct exposure at the selected shutter speed,  
the electronic analog exposure display ( 69) in the viewfinder will show the amount of  
under- or over-exposure and one of the following indicators will be displayed in the control  
panel and viewfinder aperture displays:  
Indicator  
Description  
Subject too bright. Choose faster shutter speed or lower ISO sensitivity ( 33), or use optional  
Neutral Density (ND) filter.  
Subject too dark. Choose slower shutter speed or higher ISO sensitivity ( 33), or use flash.  
Long Exp. NR ( 131)  
To reduce noise at slow shutter speeds, select On for the Long Exp. NR option in the  
shooting menu. Check that the battery is fully charged before making long time expo-  
sures.  
b3—EV Step ( 154)  
This option controls whether changes to shutter speed and aperture are made in incre-  
ments equivalent to /EV (the default setting), / EV, or 1 EV.  
f5—Command Dials >Change Main/Sub ( 170)  
This option can be used to reverse the roles of the command dials so that the sub-com-  
mand dial controls shutter speed, while the main command dial controls aperture.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
65  
A: Aperture-Priority Auto  
In aperture-priority auto, you choose the aperture while the camera automati-  
cally selects the shutter speed that will produce the optimal exposure. Small  
apertures (high f/-numbers) increase depth of field, bringing both the main sub-  
ject and background into focus. Large apertures (low f/-numbers) soften back-  
ground details and let more light into the camera, increasing the range of the  
fl ash and making photographs less susceptible to blurring.  
To take photographs in aperture-priority auto:  
Press the  
button and rotate the main com-  
1
mand dial until A is displayed in the viewfinder  
and control panel.  
Rotate the sub-command dial to choose the de-  
sired aperture.  
2
3
Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
66  
Non-CPU Lenses  
If the maximum aperture of the lens has been specified using the Non-CPU Lens Data  
item in shooting menu ( 93) when a non-CPU lens is attached, the current f/-number will  
be displayed in the control panel and viewfinder, rounded  
to the nearest full stop. Otherwise the aperture displays  
will show only the number of stops ( , with maximum ap-  
erture displayed as  
) and the f/-number must be read  
from the lens aperture ring.  
Exposure Warning  
If the camera is unable to produce the correct exposure at the selected aperture, the elec-  
tronic analog exposure display ( 69) in the viewfinder will show the amount of under- or  
over-exposure and one of the following indicators will be displayed in the control panel  
and viewfinder shutter-speed displays:  
Indicator  
Description  
Subject too bright. Choose smaller aperture (larger f/-number) or ISO sensitivity ( 33), or use  
optional Neutral Density (ND) filter.  
Subject too dark. Choose larger aperture (smaller f/-number) or higher ISO sensitivity ( 33),  
or use optional Speedlight.  
b3—EV Step ( 154)  
This option controls whether changes to shutter speed and aperture are made in incre-  
ments equivalent to /EV (the default setting), / EV, or 1 EV.  
f5—Command Dials ( 170)  
Command Dials >Change Main/Sub and Command Dials >Aperture Setting con-  
trol whether aperture is assigned with the main command dial, the sub-command dial, or  
the lens aperture ring. Regardless of the settings chosen, the sub-command dial is always  
used with type G lenses, the lens aperture ring with non-CPU lenses.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
67  
M: Manual  
In manual exposure mode, you control both shutter speed and aperture. Shutter  
speed can be set to values between 30s and /s, or the shutter can be held  
open for indefinitely for longer exposures (  
). Aperture can be set to values  
between the minimum and maximum values for the lens. Using the electronic  
analog exposure display in the viewfinder, you can adjust exposure according to  
shooting conditions and the task at hand.  
To take photographs in manual exposure mode:  
Press the  
button and rotate the main com-  
1
2
mand dial until M is displayed in the viewfinder  
and control panel.  
Rotate the main command dial to choose a  
shutter speed, and the sub-command dial to set  
aperture. Check exposure in the electronic an-  
alog exposure displays (see right), and continue  
to adjust shutter speed and aperture until the  
desired exposure is achieved.  
Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.  
3
At a shutter speed of  
, the shutter will remain open while the shutter-release button is  
held down. Nikon recommends using a fully-charged EN-EL3e battery or an optional EH-6  
AC adapter to prevent loss of power while the shutter is open. If the battery is exhausted  
during shooting, the camera will record the photograph to the memory card and then turn  
off automatically.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
68  
Electronic Analog Exposure Displays  
At shutter speeds other than  
, the electronic analog exposure displays in the con-  
trol panel and viewfinder show whether the photograph would be under- or over-ex-  
posed at current settings. Depending on the option chosen for Custom Setting b3 (EV  
Step), the amount of under- or over-exposure is shown in increments of /EV, /EV, or  
1EV. If the limits of the exposure metering system are exceeded, the displays will flash.  
“EV step” set to “1/3 step”  
“EV step” set to “1/2 step”  
“EV step” set to “1 step”  
Control panel  
Viewfinder  
Control panel  
Viewfinder  
Control panel  
Viewfinder  
Optimal exposure  
Underexposed by /EV  
Underexposed by /EV  
Underexposed by 1EV  
Overexposed by more than 3EV*  
* At 1/3 step,  
appears in the viewfinder when overexposure exceeds 2EV.  
AF Micro Nikkor Lenses  
Provided that an external exposure meter is used, the exposure ratio need only be taken  
into account when the lens aperture ring is used to set aperture.  
Non-CPU Lenses  
If the maximum aperture of the lens has been specified using the Non-CPU lens data  
item in shooting menu ( 93) when a non-CPU lens is attached, the current f/-num-  
ber will be displayed in the viewfinder and control  
panel, rounded to the nearest full stop. Otherwise the  
aperture displays will show only the number of stops  
(
, with maximum aperture displayed as  
) and the f/-  
number must be read from the lens aperture ring.  
Long Exp. NR ( 131)  
To reduce noise at slow shutter speeds, select On for the Long Exp. NR option in the  
shooting menu.  
b3—EV Step ( 154)  
This option controls whether changes to shutter speed and aperture are made in incre-  
ments equivalent to /EV (the default setting), / EV, or 1 EV.  
f5—Command Dials ( 170)  
Command Dials >Change Main/Sub and Command Dials >Aperture setting control  
whether aperture is assigned with the main command dial, the sub-command dial, or the  
lens aperture ring. Regardless of the settings chosen, the sub-command dial is always used  
with type G lenses, the lens aperture ring with non-CPU lenses.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
69  
Autoexposure Lock  
When center-weighted metering is used, an area in the center of the frame is  
assigned the greatest weight when determining exposure. Similarly, when spot  
metering is used, exposure is based upon lighting conditions in the selected fo-  
cus area. If the subject is not in the metered area when the picture is taken,  
exposure will be based on lighting conditions in the background, and the main  
subject may be under- or over-exposed. To prevent this, use autoexposure lock:  
Select exposure mode P, S, or A and choose cen-  
ter-weighted or spot metering (exposure lock  
has no effect in exposure mode M). If using cen-  
ter-weighted metering, select the center focus  
area with the multi selector ( 53).  
1
Position the subject in the selected focus area and press the shutter-re-  
lease button halfway. With the shutter-release button pressed halfway and  
the subject positioned in the focus area, press the AE-L/AF-L button to lock  
exposure (and focus, except in manual focus mode). Confirm that the in-  
focus indicator () appears in the viewfinder.  
2
While exposure lock is in effect, an AE-L indicator will appear in the view-  
fi nder.  
Keeping the AE-L/AF-L button pressed, recom-  
pose the photograph and shoot.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
70  
Adjusting Shutter Speed and Aperture  
While exposure lock is in effect, the following settings can be changed without altering  
the metered value for exposure:  
Exposure mode  
Settings  
Shutter speed and aperture (flexible program; 63)  
Shutter speed  
Programmed auto  
Shutter-priority auto  
Aperture-priority auto  
Aperture  
The new values can be confirmed in the viewfinder and control panel. Note that the  
metering method can not be changed while exposure lock is in effect (changes to me-  
tering take effect when the lock is released).  
Metered Area  
In spot metering, exposure will be locked at the value metered in a 3-mm (0.12in.) circle  
centered on the selected focus area. In center-weighted metering, exposure will be locked  
at the value metered in an 8-mm (0.31in.) circle at the center of the viewfinder.  
c1—AE Lock ( 156)  
If +Release Button is selected for AE Lock, exposure will lock when the shutter-release  
button is pressed halfway.  
c2—AE-L/AF-L ( 156)  
Depending on the option selected, the AE-L/AF-L button locks both focus and exposure (the  
default setting), only focus, or only exposure. Options are available for keeping exposure  
locked until the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed a second time, the shutter is released, or expo-  
sure meters turn off.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
71  
Exposure Compensation  
To obtain the desired results with certain subject compositions, it may be neces-  
sary to use exposure compensation to alter exposure from the value suggested  
by the camera. As a rule of thumb, positive compensation may be needed when  
the main subject is darker than the background, negative values when the main  
subject is brighter than the background.  
Pressing the  
button, rotate the main com-  
1
mand dial and confirm exposure compensation  
in the control panel or the viewfinder (in the  
viewfinder, positive values are shown by a  
icon, negative values by a  
icon). Exposure  
compensation can be set to values between  
5EV (underexposure) and +5EV (overexposure)  
in increments of /EV.  
0EV (  
button pressed)  
–0.3EV  
At values other than 0, the 0 at the center of  
the electronic analog exposure displays will flash  
+2.0EV  
and a  
icon will be displayed in the control  
panel and viewfinder after you release the  
button. The current value for exposure compen-  
sation can be confirmed in the electronic analog  
exposure display or by pressing the  
button.  
Frame the photograph, focus, and shoot.  
2
Normal exposure can be restored by setting exposure compensation to 0 or  
performing a two button reset ( 97). Exposure compensation is not reset  
when the camera is turned off.  
b4—Exp Comp/Fine Tune ( 154)  
Use this option to set the increments for exposure compensation to / or 1EV.  
b5—Exposure Comp. ( 155)  
If desired, exposure compensation can be set without pressing the  
button.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
72  
Exposure and Flash Bracketing  
In exposure bracketing, the camera varies exposure compensation with each  
shot, while in the case of flash bracketing, flash level is varied with each shot (i-  
TTL and, with the optional SB-800 Speedlight, auto aperture flash control modes  
only). Only one photograph is produced each time the shutter is released, mean-  
ing that several shots (up to nine) are required to complete the bracketing se-  
quence. Exposure and flash bracketing are recommended in situations in which  
it is difficult to set exposure and there is not enough time to check results and  
adjust settings with each shot.  
Select the type of bracketing to be performed  
using Custom Setting e5 (Auto BKT Set;  
166). Choose AE & Flash to vary both exposure  
and flash level (the default setting), AE Only to  
vary only exposure, or Flash Only to vary only  
fl ash level.  
1
Pressing the  
button, rotate the main com-  
2
3
mand dial to choose the number of shots in the  
bracketing sequence ( 198199). At settings  
other than zero, a BKT icon and bracketing indi-  
cator will be displayed in the control panel and  
the  
icon will blink in the control panel and  
viewfinder.  
Pressing the  
button, rotate the sub-com-  
mand dial to choose the exposure increment  
198199).  
(
Bracketing Programs  
See the Appendix for a list of exposure and flash bracketing programs.  
e8—Auto BKT Selection ( 167)  
If desired, the main command dial can be used to turn bracketing on and off and the sub-  
command dial to select both the number of shots and the exposure increment.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
73  
Compose a photograph, focus, and shoot. The camera will vary exposure  
and/or flash level shot-by-shot according to the bracketing program se-  
lected. Modifications to exposure are added to those made with exposure  
compensation ( 72), making it possible to achieve exposure compensa-  
tion values of more than 5EV.  
4
While bracketing is in effect, a bracketing progress indicator will be dis-  
played in the control panel. A segment will disappear from the indicator  
after each shot.  
To cancel bracketing, press the button and rotate the main command  
dial until the number of shots in the bracketing sequence is zero and  
is no longer displayed in the control panel. The program last in effect will  
be restored the next time bracketing is activated. Bracketing can also be  
cancelled by performing a two-button reset ( 97), although in this case  
the bracketing program will not be restored the next time bracketing is  
activated. Selecting WB Bracketing for Custom Setting e5 cancels the  
current the bracketing program.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
74  
Exposure Bracketing  
The camera modifies exposure by varying shutter speed and aperture (programmed  
auto), aperture (shutter-priority auto), or shutter speed (aperture-priority auto, manual  
exposure mode). When On is selected for Custom Setting b1 (ISO Auto), the camera  
will automatically vary ISO sensitivity for optimum exposure when the limits of the cam-  
era exposure system are exceeded. If Custom Setting e5 (Auto BKT Set) is set AE Only  
or to AE & Flash and On is selected for Custom Setting b1 (ISO Auto), the camera will  
vary ISO sensitivity without varying shutter speed or aperture, regardless of the setting  
chosen for Custom Setting e6 (see below).  
Shooting Mode  
In single frame and self-timer modes, one shot will be taken each time the shutter-release  
button is pressed. In continuous low speed and continuous high speed modes, shooting  
will pause after the number of shots specified in the bracketing program have been taken.  
Shooting will resume the next time the shutter-release button is pressed.  
Resuming Exposure or Flash Bracketing  
If the memory card fills before all shots in the sequence have been taken, shooting can be  
resumed from the next shot in the sequence after the memory card has been replaced or  
shots have been deleted to make room on the memory card. If the camera is turned off  
before all shots in the sequence have been taken, bracketing will resume from the next  
shot in the sequence when the camera is turned on.  
e6—Manual Mode Bkting ( 167)  
This option controls how the camera performs exposure and flash bracketing in manual  
exposure mode. Bracketing can be performed by varying flash level together with shutter  
speed and/or aperture, or by varying flash level alone.  
e7—Auto BKT Order ( 167)  
This option can be used to change the bracketing order.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
75  
Flash Photography  
Using the Built-in Flash  
The D200 is equipped with a Guide Number 12/39 flash (ISO 100, m/ft) that can  
be used not only when natural lighting is inadequate, but also to fill in shadows  
and backlit subjects or to add a catch light to the subject’s eyes.  
The built-in flash supports the following types of flash control:  
i-TTL Balanced Fill-Flash for Digital SLR: Speedlight emits series of nearly invisible preflashes  
(monitor preflashes) immediately before main flash. Preflashes reflected from objects in  
all areas of frame are picked up by 1,005-pixel RGB sensor and are analyzed in combina-  
tion with information from matrix metering system to adjust flash output for natural bal-  
ance between main subject and ambient background lighting. If type G or D lens is used,  
distance information is included when calculating flash output. Precision of calculation  
can be increased for non-CPU lenses by providing lens data (focal length and maximum  
aperture; 93–95). Not available when spot metering is used.  
Standard i-TTL Flash for Digital SLR: Flash output adjusted to bring lighting in frame to stan-  
dard level; brightness of background is not taken into account. Recommended for shots  
in which main subject is emphasized at expense of background details, or when exposure  
compensation is used. Standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR is activated automatically when  
spot metering is selected.  
ISO Sensitivity  
i-TTL flash control can adjust for ISO sensitivities between 100 and 1600. It may not be  
able to adjust flash level appropriately for ISO sensitivities over 1600. When On is selected  
for Custom Setting b1 (ISO Auto; 152), ISO sensitivity will automatically be adjusted as  
required for optimal flash output. This may result in foreground subjects being underex-  
posed in flash photographs taken at slow shutter speeds, in daylight, or against a bright  
background. In these cases, choose a flash mode other than slow sync or select mode A or  
M and choose a larger aperture.  
Using the Built-in Flash  
If the built-in flash is used in continuous shooting mode, only one photograph will be taken  
each time the shutter-release button is pressed.  
Vibration reduction (available with VR lenses) does not take effect if the shutter-release but-  
ton is pressed halfway while the built-in flash is recharging.  
After the built-in flash has been used for several consecutive shots, it may turn off briefly to  
protect the flash. The built-in flash can be used again after a short pause.  
Flash Angle  
The flash angle of the built-in flash can cover the field of view of an 18mm lens. It may not  
be able to light the entire subject with some lenses or apertures ( 201).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
76  
Flash Sync Modes  
The camera supports the following flash sync modes:  
Flash sync mode  
Front-curtain sync  
Red-eye reduction  
Description  
Recommended for most situations. In programmed auto and ap-  
erture-priority auto modes, shutter speed will automatically be set  
to values between / and /s (/ to /,s when using optional  
Speedlight with Auto FP High-Speed Sync; 160).  
Red-eye reduction pre-flash lights for approximately one second  
before main flash. Pupils in subject’s eyes to contract, reducing  
“red-eye” effect sometimes caused by flash.  
Combines red-eye reduction with slow sync. This mode is only  
available in programmed auto and aperture-priority auto expo-  
sure modes. Use of a tripod is recommended to prevent blurring  
caused by camera shake.  
Red-eye reduction  
with slow sync  
Flash is combined with speeds as slow as 30s to capture both  
subject and background at night or under dim light. This mode  
is only available in programmed auto and aperture-priority auto  
exposure modes. Use of tripod is recommended to prevent blur-  
ring caused by camera shake.  
Slow sync  
In shutter-priority auto or manual exposure mode, flash fires just  
before the shutter closes, creating effect of a stream of light be-  
hind moving objects. In programmed auto and aperture-priority  
auto, slow rear-curtain sync is used to capture both subject and  
background. Use of tripod is recommended to prevent blurring  
caused by camera shake.  
Rear-curtain sync  
Red-Eye Reduction  
Some lenses may block the red-eye reduction lamp, preventing the subject from seeing  
the lamp and interfering with red-eye reduction.  
Studio Flash Systems  
Rear-curtain sync can not be used with studio flash systems, as the correct synchronization  
can not be obtained.  
Compatible Lenses  
See the Appendix for information on the lenses that can be used with the built-in flash.  
e3—Built-in Flash ( 161)  
Flash mode can be selected from TTL, Manual, Repeating Flash, and Commander  
mode. When fired at full power in Manual mode, the built-in flash has a Guide Number  
of 13/42 (ISO 100, m/ft). In Repeating Flash mode, the flash fires repeatedly while the  
shutter is open. The flash output, number of flashes, and interval between flashes can  
be selected from a menu. Commander mode can be used for wireless off-camera flash  
photography with optional SB-800, SB-600, or SB-R200 Speedlights.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
77  
Using the Built-in Flash  
To use the built-in flash:  
Choose a metering method ( 61). Select ma-  
trix or center-weighted metering to activate i-  
TTL Balanced Fill-Flash for Digital SLR. Standard  
i-TTL Flash for Digital SLR is activated automati-  
cally when spot metering is selected.  
1
Press the flash pop-up button. The built-in flash  
will pop up and begin charging. When the flash  
is fully charged, the flash-ready indicator will  
light.  
2
Press the button and rotate the main com-  
mand dial until the desired flash sync icon is dis-  
played in the control panel.  
3
Front curtain  
sync  
Red-eye  
reduction  
Rear  
Red-eye  
Slow  
curtain  
reduction+  
sync2  
sync3  
slow sync1  
1 Available only in exposure modes P and A. In  
modes S and M, (red-eye reduction) is selected  
when the button is released.  
2 In exposure modes P and A, flash-sync mode will  
be set to  
(slow rear-curtain sync) when the  
button is released.  
3 Available only in exposure modes P and A. In  
modes S and M,  
(front-curtain sync) is selected  
when button is released.  
When the Speedlight Is Not in Use  
To save battery power when the Speedlight is not in use, return it to the closed position  
by pressing it lightly downward until the latch clicks into place.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78  
Press the shutter-release button halfway and check exposure (shutter  
speed and aperture). The shutter speeds and apertures available when the  
built-in flash is raised are listed below.  
4
Exposure mode  
Shutter speed  
Aperture  
P
S
A
Set automatically by camera (/–/s)1 Set automatically 63  
Value selected by user (/–30s)2  
Set automatically by camera (/–/s)1  
Value selected by user (/–30s)2  
by camera  
Value selected by  
user3  
64  
66  
68  
M
1 Limit for slow shutter speed is set using Custom Setting e2 (Flash Shutter Speed;  
161). Regardless of option selected, camera may set shutter to speeds as slow  
as 30s at flash sync settings of slow sync, slow rear-curtain sync, and slow sync  
with red-eye reduction.  
2 Speeds faster than /s will be reduced to /s when built-in flash is raised or  
optional Speedlight is attached and turned on.  
3 Flash range varies with ISO sensitivity and aperture. Consult table of flash of flash  
ranges ( 200) when setting aperture in A and M modes.  
Check that the flash-ready indicator appears in  
the viewfinder. If the flash-ready indicator is not  
displayed when the built-in flash is used, the  
shutter release will be disabled.  
5
6
Compose the photograph, making sure that the subject is within range of  
the flash ( 200), then focus and shoot. If the flash-ready light blinks for  
about three seconds after the photograph is taken, the flash has fired at  
full output and the photograph may be underexposed. Check the results  
in the monitor. If the photograph is underexposed, adjust settings and try  
again.  
e1—Flash Sync Speed ( 160)  
This option can be used to enable Auto FP High-Speed Sync (optional SB-800, SB-600, or  
SB-R200 Speedlight required; not available if built-in flash is fired) or to limit the fastest sync  
speed to a speed slower than /s. To fix shutter speed at the sync speed limit in exposure  
modes S and M, select the setting after the slowest possible shutter speed (30s or  
).  
An X will be displayed in the flash sync indicator in the control panel.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
79  
Flash Exposure Compensation  
Flash exposure compensation can be used to increase or reduce flash output  
from the level chosen by the camera’s flash control system. Flash output can  
be increased to make the main subject appear brighter, or reduced to prevent  
unwanted highlights or reflections. As a rule of thumb, positive compensation  
may be needed when the main subject is darker than the background, negative  
compensation when the main subject is brighter than the background.  
Pressing the  
button, rotate the sub-command  
dial and confirm flash exposure compensation in the  
control panel or viewfinder. Flash exposure compen-  
sation can be set to values between –3EV (darker)  
and +1EV (brighter) in increments of /EV.  
At values other than 0, a  
in the control panel and viewfinder after you release  
the button. The current value for flash exposure  
icon will be displayed  
compensation can be confirmed by pressing the  
button.  
Normal flash output can be restored by setting flash exposure compensation to  
0.0 or performing a two button reset ( 97). Flash exposure compensation is  
not reset when the camera is turned off.  
Using Flash Exposure Compensation with Optional Speedlights  
Flash exposure compensation is also available when an optional SB-800 or SB-600  
Speedlight is attached.  
Modeling Illumination  
The built-in flash and optional SB-800, SB-600, and SB-R200 Speedlights emit a model-  
ing flash when the camera depth-of-field preview button is pressed. Modeling illumi-  
nation can be turned off using Custom Setting e4 (Modeling Flash; 166).  
b3—EV Step ( 154)  
This option can be used to set the increments for flash compensation to / or 1EV.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
80  
FV Lock  
This feature is used to lock flash output, allowing photographs to be recomposed  
without changing the flash level. This ensures that flash output is appropriate to  
the subject even when the subject is not positioned in the center of the frame.  
Flash output is adjusted automatically for any changes in ISO sensitivity or aper-  
ture. To use FV lock:  
Select FV Lock or FV Lock/Lens Data for Cus-  
tom Setting f4 (FUNC. Button; 170).  
1
Press the flash pop-up button to raise the flash.  
2
Position the subject in the center of the frame  
and press the shutter-release button halfway to  
focus.  
3
Press the FUNC. button. The flash will emit a  
monitor preflash to determine the appropriate  
fl ash level. Flash output will be locked at this lev-  
4
el and FV lock icons (  
and ) will appear  
in the control panel and viewfinder.  
Recompose the photograph.  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
81  
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the  
way down to shoot. If desired, additional pic-  
tures can be taken without releasing FV lock.  
6
7
Press the camera FUNC. button to release FV lock  
and confirm that the FV lock icons (  
and  
) are no longer displayed in the control panel  
and viewfinder.  
Using FV Lock with Optional Speedlights  
FV lock is also available with SB-800, SB-600, and SB-R200 Speedlights (available sepa-  
rately). Set the Speedlight to TTL mode (the SB-800 can also be used in AA mode; see  
the Speedlight manual for details). While FV lock is in effect, flash output will automati-  
cally be adjusted for changes in Speedlight zoom head position.  
When Commander Mode is selected for Custom Setting e3 (Built-in Flash;  
161),  
FV lock can be used with remote SB-800, SB-600, or SB-R200 flash units if (a) any of the  
built-in flash, flash group A, or flash group B is in TTL mode, or (b) a flash group is com-  
posed entirely of SB-800 Speedlights in TTL or AA mode.  
Using FV Lock with the Built-in Flash  
When the built-in flash is used alone, FV lock is only available if TTL (the default setting) is  
selected for Custom Setting e3 (Built-in Flash; 161).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
82  
Self-Timer Mode  
The self-timer can be used to reduce camera shake or for self-portraits.  
Mount the camera on a tripod (recommended) or place the camera on a  
stable, level surface.  
1
Press the shooting mode dial lock release and  
rotate the shooting mode dial to select (self-  
timer mode).  
2
Frame the photograph and focus. If autofocus  
is in effect, be sure not to block the lens when  
activating the self-timer. In single-servo autofo-  
cus ( 51), photographs can only be taken if the  
in-focus () indicator appears in the viewfinder.  
3
Close the Viewfinder Eyepiece Shutter  
In exposure modes other than manual, remove the  
viewfinder eyepiece cup and insert the supplied DK-5  
eyepiece cap as shown. This prevents light entering  
via the viewfinder from interfering with exposure.  
Press the shutter-release button all the way  
down to start the self-timer. The self-timer lamp  
(AF-assist lamp) will start to blink and a beep will  
begin to sound. Two seconds before the photo-  
graph is taken, the self-timer lamp will stop blinking and the beeping will  
become more rapid.  
4
The Built-in Flash  
The self-timer will be cancelled if the built-in flash is raised before the picture is  
taken. To start the timer after raising the flash, wait until the flash-ready indicator is  
displayed in the viewfinder and then press the shutter-release button.  
To turn the self-timer off before a photograph is taken, press the mode dial lock  
release and turn the mode dial to another setting.  
In self-timer mode, a shutter speed of  
is equivalent to approximately 1/6 s.  
c4—Self-Timer ( 157)  
Self-timer delay can be set to 2s, 5s, 10s (the default setting), or 20s.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
83  
Image Overlay and Multiple Exposure  
The following options are available for combining multiple exposures in a single  
frame:  
• Image overlay: two existing RAW photographs are combined to form a single  
picture which is saved separately from the originals. The originals must be on  
the same memory card.  
• Multiple exposure: a series of two to ten exposures is recorded as a single photo-  
graph. The individual exposures are not saved separately.  
Image Overlay  
Overlays are created using the Image Overlay option in the shooting menu.  
The new picture is saved at current image quality and size settings. Before  
creating an overlay, set image quality and size ( 28).  
1
Highlight Image Overlay in the shooting  
menu ( 124) and press the multi selector to  
the right.  
2
A preview will be displayed with Image 1 high-  
lighted.  
Press the button to view the RAW images on  
the memory card. Press the multi selector left  
or right to highlight images. To zoom in on the  
3
highlighted image, press and hold the  
ton.  
but-  
Press the center of the multi selector to select  
the highlighted image and return to the pre-  
view display. The selected image will appear as  
Image 1.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
84  
Press the multi selector up or down to select a  
value for gain between 0.1 and 2.0. The default  
value is 1.0; selecting 0.5 cuts gain in half, while  
selecting 2.0 doubles gain. The effects of gain  
are visible in the preview image.  
5
Press the multi selector left or right to highlight Image 2. Repeat steps 3–5  
to select the second image and adjust gain.  
6
7
Press the multi selector left or right to highlight  
Overlay and press the  
button to display a  
confirmation dialog (to save the new image  
without displaying the confirmation dialog,  
highlight Save and press the  
button). Press  
the button to save the new image, or the  
button to return to the preview dialog.  
Selecting Photographs for Image Overlay  
Only RAW photographs taken with the D200 can be selected for image overlay. Other  
images are not displayed in the thumbnail list. Hidden images are not displayed and can  
not be selected.  
Image Overlay  
The new image is recorded at current image quality, image size, and file name settings  
under a file name assigned by adding one to the largest file number in the current folder.  
White balance, sharpening, color space, color mode, and hue settings are copied from the  
photograph selected for Image 1, as are the date of recording, metering, shutter speed,  
aperture, exposure mode, exposure compensation, focal length, orientation, and other  
photo information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
85  
Multiple Exposure  
To create a multiple exposure:  
Highlight Multiple exposure in the shooting  
menu ( 124) and press the multi selector to  
the right.  
1
Press the multi selector up or down to highlight  
Number of Shots and press the multi selector  
to the right.  
2
Press the multi selector up or down to choose  
the number of exposures that will be combined  
to form a single photograph. Press the multi se-  
lector to the right to return to the multiple expo-  
sure menu.  
3
Press the multi selector up or down to highlight  
Auto Gain and press the multi selector to the  
right.  
4
Press the multi selector up or down to highlight  
one of the following options and then press the  
multi selector to the right.  
5
Option  
Description  
Gain adjusted according to number of ex-  
On posures actually recorded (gain for each  
(default) exposure is set to / for 2 exposures, / for 3  
exposures, etc.).  
Gain is not adjusted when recording mul-  
tiple exposure.  
Off  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
86  
Press the multi selector up or down to highlight  
Done and press the multi selector to the right.  
6
7
A
icon will be displayed in the control panel.  
Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot. In con-  
tinuous high-speed or continuous low-speed  
mode ( 26), the camera will record all expo-  
sures in a single burst. In single-frame shooting  
mode, one photograph will be taken each time the shutter-release but-  
ton is pressed; continue shooting until all exposures have been recorded.  
Shooting will end automatically if:  
• No operations are performed for 30s during shooting, or for 30s after the  
monitor has turned off during playback or menu operations  
• The user selects Reset or Cancel in the mul-  
tiple exposure menu and presses the multi se-  
lector to the right  
• The camera is turned off  
• The battery is exhausted  
• Pictures are deleted  
If shooting ends before the specified number of exposures have been  
taken, a multiple exposure will be created from the exposures that have  
been recorded to that point. If Auto Gain is on, gain will be adjusted to  
refl ect the number of exposures actually recorded. To end shooting with-  
out creating a multiple exposure, press the button while turning the  
camera off.  
The  
When shooting ends, multiple exposure mode  
will end and the icon will no longer be dis-  
icon will blink until shooting ends.  
played. Repeat steps 1–7 to take additional mul-  
tiple exposures.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
87  
Exchanging Memory Cards  
Do not remove or replace the memory card while recording a multiple exposure.  
Photo Info  
The information listed in the playback photo information display (including date of record-  
ing and camera orientation) is for the first shot in the multiple exposure.  
Auto Meter Off  
Unless No Limit is selected for Custom Setting c3 (Auto Meter-Off; 157) or the camera  
is powered by an optional EH-6 AC adapter, shooting will end and a multiple exposure will  
be recorded if no operations are performed for 30s. To prevent the exposure meters from  
turning off before the 30s limit has expired, 30s are added to the auto meter-off delay  
when shooting starts. The existing meter-off delay is restored when shooting ends.  
White Balance ( 35)  
If Auto is selected for white balance, white balance will be fixed at a value suitable for  
direct sunlight while multiple exposure mode is in effect. Only use Auto if the subject is  
in direct sunlight.  
Interval Timer Photography  
If interval timer photography is activated before the first exposure is taken, the camera will  
record exposures at the selected interval until the number of exposures specified in the  
multiple exposure menu have been taken (the number of shots listed in the interval timer  
shooting menu is ignored). These exposures will then be recorded as a single photograph  
and multiple exposure mode and interval timer shooting will end. Note that unless No  
Limit is selected for Custom Setting c3 (Auto Meter-Off;  
157) or the camera is pow-  
ered by an optional EH-6 AC adapter, shooting will end automatically if no operations are  
performed for 30s; when recording a multiple exposure using the interval timer, choose an  
interval of less than 30s, select No Limit for Custom Setting c3 (Auto Meter-Off; 157),  
or use an AC adapter. Cancelling multiple exposure cancels interval timer shooting.  
Bracketing and Other Settings  
Bracketing is cancelled when multiple exposure is selected and can not be restored until  
shooting has ended. While multiple exposure mode is in effect, memory cards can not be  
formatted and the following can not be changed: shooting menu options other than Intvl  
Timer Shooting (Intvl Timer Shooting can only be adjusted before the first exposure is  
taken), Dust Off Ref Photo, and Mirror Lock-up.  
Two Button Reset ( 97)  
Multiple exposure settings are not affected when a two-button reset is performed. Per-  
forming a two-button reset does not cancel multiple exposure mode.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
88  
Interval Timer Photography  
The D200 is equipped to take photographs automatically at preset intervals.  
Highlight Intvl Timer Shooting in the shoot-  
ing menu ( 124) and press the multi selector  
to the right.  
1
Press the multi selector up or down to choose  
one of the following Start options:  
Now: Shooting begins after a delay of about 3s  
2
Start time: Shooting begins at Start time  
Press the multi selector left or right to highlight  
the following options and press the multi selec-  
tor up or down to change interval timer set-  
tings.  
3
Option  
Description  
Enter start time for interval timer photography when Start time  
is selected for Start. Press multi selector left or right to highlight  
starting hour or minute, press up or down to change. Not available  
when Now is selected for Start.  
Start time  
Enter time between shots. Press multi selector left or right to high-  
light hour, minute, or second, press up or down to change. Note  
Interval that camera will not be able to take photographs at specified in-  
terval if interval is shorter than shutter speed or time required to  
record images.  
Choose number of intervals and number of shots taken at each in-  
Select  
terval. Press multi selector left or right to highlight number of inter-  
Intvl*Shots vals or number of shots, press up or down to change. Total number  
of shots that will be taken appears to right.  
Remaining Shows number of intervals and total shots remaining in current in-  
(intvl*shots) terval program. This item can not be edited.  
Choose Off to adjust settings without starting interval timer. To start  
Start  
interval timer, select On and press . Shooting will start at selected  
start time and will continue for specified number of intervals.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
89  
Highlight Start at the bottom of the interval timer menu and press the  
multi selector up or down to select On, then press the button. The first  
series of shots will be taken at the specified starting time. Shooting will  
continue at the selected interval until all shots have been taken. If shoot-  
ing can not proceed at current settings (for example, if a shutter speed of  
is currently selected in manual exposure mode, or the starting time  
is less than one minute from the current time), a warning will appear and  
the interval timer menu will be displayed again.  
4
Use of a tripod is recommended.  
Take a Test Shot  
Before beginning interval timer photography, take a test shot at current settings and view  
the results in the monitor. Remember that the camera will focus before each shot—no  
shots will be taken if the camera is unable to focus in single-servo AF.  
Use a Reliable Power Source  
To ensure that shooting is not interrupted, be sure the battery is fully charged. If in doubt,  
charge the battery before shooting or use an optional EH-6 AC adapter.  
Check the Time  
Before choosing a starting time, select World Time in the setup menu and make sure that  
the camera clock is set to the correct time and date ( 12).  
Out of Memory  
If the memory card is full, the interval timer will remain active but no pictures will be tak-  
en. Delete some pictures or turn the camera off and insert another memory card. When  
the camera is turned on, interval timer photography will be paused. See “Pausing Interval  
Timer Photographyon the following page for information on resuming interval timer pho-  
tography.  
Bracketing  
Adjust bracketing settings before starting interval timer photography. If exposure and/or  
fl ash bracketing is active while interval timer photography is in effect, the camera will take  
the number of shots in the bracketing program at each interval, regardless of the number  
of shots specified in the interval timer menu. If white balance bracketing is active while  
interval timer photography is in effect, the camera will take only one shot at each interval  
and process it to create the number of copies specified in the bracketing program.  
The Eyepiece Cap  
In exposure modes other than manual, remove the view-  
fi nder eyepiece cup and insert the supplied DK-5 eyepiece  
cap to prevent light entering via the viewfinder from inter-  
fering with exposure.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
90  
During Shooting  
During interval timer photography, the  
icon in  
the control panel will blink. Immediately before the next  
shooting interval begins, the shutter speed display will  
show the number of intervals remaining, and the aperture  
display will show the number of shots remaining in the  
current interval. At other times, the number of intervals remaining and the number  
of shots in each interval can be viewed by pressing the shutter-release button halfway  
(once the button is released, the shutter speed and aperture will be displayed until the  
exposure meters turn o).  
To view other interval timer settings while shooting is in  
progress, select Intvl Timer Shooting between shots.  
While interval timer photography is in progress, the inter-  
val timer menu will show the starting time, the shooting  
interval, the selected number of intervals and number of  
shots, and the number of intervals and shots remaining.  
None of these items can be changed while interval timer  
photography is in progress.  
Pausing Interval Timer Photography  
To pause interval timer photography:  
• Press the button between intervals.  
• Highlight Start at the bottom of the interval timer menu and press the multi selector  
up or down until Pause is displayed, then press the button  
• Turn the camera off (if desired, the memory card can be replaced while the camera is  
o). Interval timer photography will be paused when the camera is turned on.  
To resume shooting, choose a Start option as described  
in Step 2 ( 89). If Start time is selected, a new start-  
ing time can be chosen as described in Step 3; the inter-  
val, number of intervals, and number of shots can not be  
changed. Highlight Start at the bottom of the interval  
timer menu and press the multi selector up or down until  
Restart is displayed, then press the button.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
91  
Interrupting Interval Timer Photography  
To interrupt interval timer photography, highlight Start at the bottom of the interval  
timer menu and press the multi selector up or down until Done is displayed, then press  
the button.  
Interval timer photography will also be interrupted if:  
• A two button reset is performed ( 97).  
Menu Reset is selected in the shooting menu ( 127).  
• Bracketing settings are changed ( 73).  
• The battery is exhausted.  
Normal shooting will resume when interval timer photography ends.  
During Shooting  
Shooting and menu settings can be adjusted freely while interval timer photography is in  
progress. Note the following:  
• Performing a two-button reset ( 97) or changing bracketing settings ( 73) will cancel  
interval timer photography.  
• The monitor will turn off about four seconds before each interval.  
Multiple Exposure  
Interval timer shooting can be used to create a multiple exposure ( 86).  
Shooting Mode  
Regardless of the shooting mode selected, the camera will take the specified number of  
shots at each interval. In CH (continuous high speed) mode, photographs will be taken  
at a rate of five shots per second. In S (single frame), CL (continuous low-speed), and MUP  
(mirror up) modes, photographs will be taken at the rate chosen for Custom Setting d4  
(Shooting Speed;  
158). In  
(self-timer) mode, the shutter-release delay applies to  
each photograph taken. In MUP mode, the mirror will be raised automatically immediately  
before each shot.  
Shooting Menu Banks  
Changes to interval timer settings apply to all shooting menu banks ( 125). If shooting  
menu settings are reset using the Menu Reset item in the shooting menu ( 127), interval  
timer settings will be reset as follows:  
• Start time: Now  
• Interval: 00:01´:00˝  
• Number of intervals: 1  
• Number of shots: 1  
• Start: Off  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
92  
Non-CPU Lenses  
By specifying lens data (lens focal length and maximum aperture), the user can  
gain access to a variety of CPU lens functions when using a non-CPU lens. If the  
focal length of the lens is known:  
• Automatic power zoom can be used with optional SB-800 and SB-600 Speed-  
lights  
• Lens focal length is listed (with an asterisk) in the playback photo info display  
When the maximum aperture of the lens is known:  
• The aperture value is displayed in the control panel and viewfinder  
• Flash level is adjusted for changes in aperture  
• Aperture is listed (with an asterisk) in the playback photo info display  
Specifying both the focal length and maximum aperture of the lens:  
• Enables color matrix metering (note that it may be necessary to use center-  
weighted or spot metering to achieve accurate results with some lenses, in-  
cluding Reflex-Nikkor lenses)  
• Improves the precision of center-weighted and spot metering and i-TTL Bal-  
anced Fill-Flash for Digital SLR  
Specifying Lens Focal Length  
Lens focal length can be specified using the Non-CPU Lens Data option in the  
shooting menu or by pressing the FUNC. button and rotating the main com-  
mand dial. The following settings are available:  
• 6–45mm: 6, 8, 13, 15, 16, 18, 20, 24, 25, 28, 35, 43, and 45mm  
• 50–180mm: 50, 55, 58, 70, 80, 85, 86, 100, 105, 135, and 180mm  
• 200–4000mm: 200, 300, 360, 400, 500, 600, 800, 1000, 1200, 1400, 1600, 2000,  
2400, 2800, 3200, and 4000mm  
The Non-CPU Lens Data Menu  
Highlight Non-CPU Lens Data in the shooting  
menu ( 124) and press the multi selector to  
the right.  
1
The FUNC. Button  
Lower the built-in flash and turn any optional Speedlights off before using the FUNC. but-  
ton to specify lens data.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
93  
Highlight Focal Length and press the multi se-  
lector to the right.  
2
3
4
Select the group to which the lens belongs from  
6–45 mm, 50–180 mm, 200–4000 mm and  
press the multi selector to the right.  
Select the lens focal length (in mm) and press  
the multi selector to the right.  
The FUNC. Button  
Select FV Lock/Lens Data for Custom Setting  
f4 (FUNC. Button; 170).  
1
Press the FUNC. button and rotate the main  
command dial. Focal length is displayed in the  
control panel:  
2
Focal Length Not Listed  
If the correct focal length is not listed, choose the closest value greater than the actual focal  
length of the lens.  
Default Maximum Aperture  
Selecting a focal length sets Maximum Aperture to the last value selected at that focal  
length.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
94  
Specifying Maximum Aperture  
Lens maximum aperture can be specified using the Non-CPU Lens Data option  
in the shooting menu or by pressing the FUNC. button and rotating the sub-  
command dial. The following f/-numbers are available:  
• 1.2, 1.4, 1.8, 2, 2.5, 2.8, 3.3, 3.5, 4, 4.5, 5, 5.6, 6.3, 7.1, 8, 9.5, 11, 13, 15, 16, 19, 22  
The Non-CPU Lens Data Menu  
Highlight Maximum Aperture in the Non-  
CPU Lens Data menu and press the multi se-  
lector to the right.  
1
Select the f/-number corresponding to the max-  
imum lens aperture and press the multi selector  
to the right.  
2
The FUNC. Button  
Select FV Lock/Lens Data for Custom Setting  
f4 (FUNC. Button; 170).  
1
Press the FUNC. button and rotate the sub-com-  
mand dial. Maximum aperture is displayed in  
the control panel:  
2
Zoom Lenses  
Lens data are not adjusted when non-CPU lenses are zoomed in or out. After changing the  
zoom position, select new values for lens focal length and maximum aperture.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
95  
Using a GPS Unit  
Garmin and Magellan GPS units that conform to version 2.01 or later of the Na-  
tional Marine Electronics Association NMEA0183 protocol can be connected to  
the camera’s ten-pin remote terminal using an MC-35 GPS adapter cord (avail-  
able separately; 182), allowing information on the camera’s current position to  
be recorded when photographs are taken. Operation has been confirmed with  
the following devices:  
• Garmin eTrex series  
• Magellan SporTrak series  
These devices connect to the MC-35 using the cable provided by the manufac-  
turer of the GPS device. See the MC-35 instruction manual for details. Before  
turning the camera on, set the GPS device to NMEA mode.  
When the camera establishes communication with a  
GPS device, a icon will be displayed in the control  
panel. The exposure meters will not turn off while  
this icon is displayed. Photo information for pictures  
taken while the  
icon is displayed will include an  
additional page ( 100) recording the current latitude, longitude, altitude, and  
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). If no data are received from the GPS unit for  
two seconds, the  
icon will clear from the display and the camera will stop  
recording GPS information.  
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC)  
UTC data is provided by the GPS device and is independent of the camera clock.  
GPS Data  
GPS data are only recorded when the  
icon is displayed. Confirm that the  
icon is  
icon indicates that the GPS  
icon is flashing will not include  
displayed in the control panel before shooting. A flashing  
device is searching for a signal; pictures taken while the  
GPS data.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
96  
Two-Button Reset  
The camera settings listed below can be restored to  
default values by holding the QUAL and  
buttons  
down together for more than two seconds (these  
buttons are marked by a green dot). The control pan-  
els turn off briefly while settings are reset. Custom  
Settings are not affected.  
Option  
Focus area  
Default  
Center*  
Option  
Bracketing  
Default  
Off‡  
Exposure mode  
Flexible program  
Exposure  
compensation  
AE hold  
Programmed auto  
Off  
Flash sync mode  
Flash exposure  
compensation  
FV lock  
Front-curtain sync  
0
0
Off  
Off†  
‡ Number of shots is reset to zero. Bracketing  
increment is reset to 1EV (exposure/flash  
bracketing) or 1 (white balance bracket-  
ing).  
* If AF-area mode is set to group dynamic-AF,  
center group will be selected.  
† Custom Setting c2 (AE-L/AF-L) is unaf-  
fected.  
The following shooting-menu options will also be reset. Only settings in the  
bank currently selected using the Shooting Menu Bank option will be reset (  
125). Settings in the remaining banks are unaffected.  
Option  
Image Quality  
Image Size  
Default  
JPEG Normal  
Large  
Option  
White Balance  
ISO Sensitivity  
Default  
Auto*  
100  
* Fine-tuning reset to 0.  
Reset Shooting Menu ( 127)  
Other shooting menu options for the current shooting menu bank can be reset by select-  
ing Yes for the Menu Reset option in the shooting menu.  
R—Menu Reset ( 147)  
Custom Settings for the current custom settings bank can be restored to default values by  
selecting Yes for Custom Setting R (Menu Reset).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
97  
Reference: More on Playback  
Viewing Photographs  
Single-Image Playback  
To play photographs back, press the button. The  
most recent photograph will be displayed in the  
monitor.  
To end playback and return to shooting mode, press the button or press the  
shutter-release button halfway. To view camera menus ( 24), press the but-  
ton.  
Using the Multi Selector  
The multi selector can be used at any time when the monitor is on. The focus selector  
lock switch only takes effect when the monitor is off.  
Image Review ( 141)  
When On is selected for Image review in the playback menu, photographs are automati-  
cally displayed in the monitor as they are being recorded to the memory card. In single-  
frame, self-timer, and mirror-up modes, photographs are displayed one at a time as they  
are taken. In continuous shooting mode, display begins when shooting ends, with the first  
photograph in the current series displayed. Playback will be interrupted when the shutter-  
release button is pressed, and resume when the button is released after shooting.  
Rotate Tall ( 142)  
This playback menu option controls whether portrait-ori-  
entation photographs taken with On selected for the Auto  
Image Rotation option in the setup menu are automati-  
cally rotated during playback.  
c5—Monitor-Off ( 157)  
The monitor will turn off automatically to save power if no operations are performed for  
the time specified in Custom Setting c5 (Monitor Off). Press the button again to return  
to playback mode.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
98  
Photo Information  
Photo information is superimposed on images displayed in single-image play-  
back. There are up to eight pages of information for each photo. Press the multi-  
selector down to cycle through photo information as follows: (Histogram), Basic  
Information, File Information, (Shooting Data Page 1), (Shooting Data Page 2),  
(GPS Data), (RGB Histogram), and (Highlights). Press the multi selector up to cycle  
through photo information in reverse order.  
³
Basic Information  
1 Protect status ..................104 2 Folder number/frame  
number...............................135  
·
³
·
»
File Information  
1 Protect status ..................104 6 Date of recording ............12  
2 Focus brackets*..................53 7 Time of recording............12  
3 Frame number/total  
8 File name ...........................129  
number of frames ........135 9 Image size ............................32  
4 Folder name.....................135 10 Folder number/frame  
¿
´
5 Image quality.....................28  
number...............................135  
²
º
¾ µ  
* If Focus Area is selected for Display Mode in the playback menu  
141), active focus area is highlighted in red (in photos taken using  
(
single-servo AF with dynamic-area AF, group dynamic-AF, or closest-  
subject priority, area where focus first locked is highlighted).  
Shooting Data Page 1*  
³
1 Protect status ..................104 7 Exposure  
·
¿
²
º
2 Camera name  
compensation ...................72  
»
´
¾
3 Metering method............61 8 Focal length .....................176  
4 Shutter speed ........... 62–69 9 Flash sync mode ..............77  
5 Aperture................................62 10 Folder number/frame  
6 Exposure mode.................62  
* Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode ( 141).  
number...............................135  
µ
f3—Photo Info/Playback ( 169)  
The roles of the multi selector buttons can be reversed, so that the left and right buttons  
display other images and the up and down buttons control photo information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
99  
Shooting Data Page 2*  
³
1 Protect status ..................104 7 Color mode/  
·
¿
²
º
2 Image optimization........45  
Hue adjustment ...............47  
»
´
¾
3 ISO sensitivity...................33 8 Saturation.............................48  
4 White balance/White 9 Image comment...........118  
balance adjustment.......35 10 Folder number/frame  
5 Tone compensation.......47  
6 Sharpening..........................46  
number...............................135  
µ
* Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode ( 141).  
Displayed in red if photo was taken with auto ISO on.  
GPS Data*  
³
1 Protect status ..................104 5 Coordinated Universal  
2 Latitude†  
3 Longitude†  
4 Altitude  
Time (UTC)  
6 Folder number/frame  
number...............................135  
·
»
¿
´
* Displayed only if GPS device was used when photo was taken (  
96).  
²
†Items displayed may differ when photo is viewed on a computer.  
RGB Histogram*  
³
·
1 Protect status ..................104 4 Histogram (RGB chan-  
´
²
2 Image highlights (areas  
of image that may be  
overexposed) are marked  
by a flashing border†  
nel). In all histograms,  
horizontal axis gives pixel  
brightness, vertical axis  
number of pixels.  
»
¿
3 Folder number/frame  
number...............................135 6 Histogram (green chan-  
5 Histogram (red channel)  
º
nel)  
7 Histogram (blue channel)  
8 Current channel  
* Displayed only if RGB histogram is selected for Display mode (  
141).  
†Highlights can be displayed separately for  
each color channel. Press multi selector left or  
right while pressing button to cycle through  
channels as follows: RGB (all channels)R  
(red)G (green)B (blue)highlight dis-  
play oRGB.  
Histograms  
Camera histograms may differ from those displayed in imaging applications.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
100  
Highlights*  
³
·
1 Protect status ........................................................................................104  
2 Image highlights (areas of image that may be overex-  
posed) are marked by a flashing border†  
3 Current channel  
4 Folder number/frame number ..................................................135  
* Displayed only if Highlight is selected for Display mode (  
141).  
†Highlights can be displayed separately for  
each color channel. Press multi selector left  
»
¿
»
or right while pressing  
button to cycle  
through channels as follows: RGB (all chan-  
nels)R (red)G (green)B (blue)RGB.  
Histogram*  
³
·
1 Protect status ........................................................................................104  
2 Histogram showing the distribution of tones in the  
image. Horizontal axis corresponds to pixel brightness,  
vertical axis shows number of pixels of each brightness  
in image.  
3 Folder number/frame number ..................................................135  
* Displayed only if Histogram is selected for Display mode (  
141).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
101  
Viewing Multiple Images: Thumbnail Playback  
To display images in “contact sheets” of four or nine  
images, press the  
button and rotate the main  
command dial. The following operations can be per-  
formed while thumbnails are displayed:  
To  
Use  
Description  
Press  
button and rotate main command dial  
Change num-  
ber of images  
displayed  
to change the number of images displayed as  
follows: single imagefour thumbnailsnine  
thumbnailssingle image.  
Toggle full frame  
playback  
Press center of multi selector to switch back and  
forth between full frame and thumbnail playback.  
Highlight  
photographs  
Press multi selector up, right, left, or down to high-  
light thumbnails.  
Page through  
photos  
Press  
button and rotate sub-command dial to  
scroll through photos a page at a time.  
Confirmation dialog will be  
displayed. Press again to  
delete photo. Press but-  
ton to exit without deleting  
photo.  
Delete photo  
Zoom in on  
highlighted  
photo  
Press  
103).  
for enlarged view of highlighted photo  
( )  
(
To protect image, or to remove protection from  
protected image, press button ( 104).  
Press button to display camera menus ( 24).  
To end playback and return to shooting mode,  
Protect photo  
Display menus  
Return to shoot-  
ing mode  
Shutter-release/  
press  
button or press shutter-release button  
halfway.  
Image Review ( 141)  
When On is selected for Image Review in the playback menu, photographs are automati-  
cally displayed in the monitor as they are being recorded to the memory card. In single-  
frame and self-timer modes, photographs are displayed one at a time as they are taken. In  
continuous shooting mode, display begins when shooting ends. Thumbnail playback is  
only available in continuous shooting mode.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
102  
Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom  
Press the  
button to zoom in on the image dis-  
played in single-image playback or on the image  
currently highlighted in thumbnail playback. The fol-  
lowing operations can be performed while zoom is  
in effect:  
To  
Use  
( )  
Description  
Cancel/resume  
zoom  
Press  
to cancel zoom and return to single-image or  
thumbnail playback. Press again to zoom image in.  
Press button to display frame  
showing area currently zoomed  
in. While button is pressed,  
multi selector can be used to  
Select area  
displayed  
move frame and main command  
dial can be used to control size of  
frame—rotate dial counterclockwise to zoom out, clock-  
wise to zoom in to maximum of approximately 25× (large  
images), 19× (medium images), or 13× (small images). Re-  
lease button to magnify selected area to fill monitor.  
View other  
images  
Rotate main command dial to view same area of other im-  
ages at current zoom ratio.  
Use multi selector to view area not  
visible in monitor. Hold multi selec-  
tor down to scroll rapidly to other  
areas of frame.  
View other  
areas of image  
Using the Multi Selector  
The multi selector can be used at any time when the monitor is on. The focus selector  
lock switch only takes effect when the monitor is off.  
c5—Monitor-Off ( 157)  
The monitor will turn off automatically to save power if no operations are performed for  
the time specified in Custom Setting c5 (Monitor Off). Press the button again to return  
to playback mode.  
f1—Center Button > Playback Mode ( 168)  
Instead of toggling between full-frame and thumbnail playback, the center of the multi  
selector can be used to toggle playback zoom or display a histogram.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
103  
Protecting Photographs from Deletion  
In full-frame, zoom, and thumbnail playback, the button can be used to pro-  
tect photographs from accidental deletion. Protected files can not be deleted  
using the button or the Delete option in the playback menu, and have DOS  
“read-only” status when viewed on a Windows computer. Note that protected  
images will be deleted when the memory card is formatted.  
To protect a photograph:  
Display the image in full-frame playback or highlight it in the thumbnail  
list.  
1
Press the  
marked with a icon.  
button. The photograph will be  
2
To remove protection from the photograph so that it can be deleted, display the  
photograph or highlight it in the thumbnail list and then press the button.  
Removing Protection from All Images  
To remove protection from all images in the folder or folders currently selected in the  
Playback Folder menu, press the and buttons together for about two seconds.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
104  
Deleting Individual Photographs  
To delete a photograph displayed in single-image or zoom playback, or the pho-  
tograph highlighted in thumbnail playback, press the button. Once deleted,  
photographs can not be recovered.  
Display the image or highlight it in the thumbnail list.  
1
2
Press the button. A confirmation dialog will  
be displayed.  
To delete the photograph, press the button again. Press the button  
to exit without deleting the photograph.  
3
Protected and Hidden Images  
Images marked with a  
icon are protected and can not be deleted. Hidden images are  
not displayed in single-image or thumbnail playback and can not be selected for deletion.  
Delete ( 133)  
To delete multiple images, use the Delete option in the playback menu.  
After Delete ( 142)  
The After Delete option in the playback menu determines whether the next image or the  
previous image is displayed after an image is deleted.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
105  
Viewing Photographs on TV  
The supplied EG-D100 video cable can be used to connect the camera to a tele-  
vision or VCR for playback or recording.  
Select the appropriate video mode from the  
Video Mode menu ( 117).  
1
Turn the camera off. Always turn the camera off  
before connecting or disconnecting the video  
cable.  
2
Open the cover protecting the video-out and  
DC-in connectors.  
3
Video out  
DC in  
Connect the video cable as shown below.  
4
Connect  
to video  
device  
Connect  
to  
camera  
Tune the television to the video channel.  
5
6
Turn the camera on. During playback, images will be displayed on the tele-  
vision screen or recorded to video tape; the camera monitor will remain off.  
Note that the edges may not be visible when photographs are viewed on  
a television screen.  
Use an AC Adapter  
Use of an EH-6 AC adapter (available separately) is recommended for extended playback.  
When the EH-6 is connected, the camera monitor-off delay will be fixed at ten minutes and  
the exposure meters will no longer turn off automatically.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
106  
Connecting to a Computer  
The supplied USB cable can be used to connect the camera to a computer.  
Once the camera is connected, the supplied software can be used to copy pho-  
tographs to the computer, where they can be browsed, viewed, and retouched.  
The camera can also be used with Nikon Capture 4 Version 4.4 or later (available  
separately), which supports batch processing and more advanced image editing  
options and can be used to control the camera directly from the computer.  
Before Connecting the Camera  
Install the necessary software after reading the manuals and reviewing the sys-  
tem requirements. To ensure that data transfer is not interrupted, be sure the  
camera battery is fully charged. If in doubt, charge the battery before use or use  
an EH-6 AC adapter (available separately).  
Before connecting the camera, set the USB option in  
the setup menu ( 121) according to the computer  
operating system and whether the camera is being  
controlled from Nikon Capture 4 Version 4.4 or later  
(available separately) or photographs are being trans-  
ferred to the computer using the supplied software:  
Operating system  
Windows XP Home Edition  
Windows XP Professional  
Mac OS X  
Supplied software  
Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control  
Choose PTP or Mass  
Storage  
Windows 2000 Professional  
Choose PTP  
Windows Millennium Edition (Me) Choose Mass Storage*  
Windows 98 Second Edition (SE)  
Mac OS 9  
Not supported  
* Do NOT select PTP. If PTP is selected when the camera is connected, the Windows hard-  
ware wizard will be displayed. Click Cancel to exit the wizard, and then disconnect the  
camera. Be sure to select Mass Storage before reconnecting the camera.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
107  
Connecting the USB Cable  
Turn the computer on and wait for it to start up.  
1
2
Turn the camera off.  
Connect the UC-E4 USB cable as shown. Connect the camera directly to  
the computer; do not connect the cable via a USB hub or keyboard.  
3
Turn the camera on. If Mass Storage is selected  
4
for USB,  
will be displayed in the control panel  
and viewfinder, and the PC mode indicator will  
fl ash (if PTP is selected, the camera displays will  
not change). Photographs can be transferred to  
the computer as described in the manual for the  
supplied software (on CD).  
If Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control is running,  
the control panel will show  
in place of the  
number of exposures remaining. Any photo-  
graphs taken will be recorded to the computer  
hard disk rather than the camera memory card.  
See Nikon Capture 4 User’s Manual for more infor-  
mation.  
During Transfer  
Do not turn the camera off while transfer is in progress.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
108  
If PTP is selected for USB ( 121), the camera can be turned off and the  
USB cable disconnected once transfer is complete. If the USB option in  
the camera setup menu is still at its default setting of Mass Storage, the  
camera must first be removed from the system as described below.  
5
Windows XP Home Edition/Windows XP Professional  
Click the “Safely Remove Hardware” icon (  
)
in the taskbar and select Safely remove USB  
Mass Storage Device from the menu that ap-  
pears.  
Windows 2000 Professional  
Click the “Unplug or Eject Hardware” icon ( ) in  
the taskbar and select Stop USB Mass Storage  
Device from the menu that appears.  
Windows Millennium Edition (Me)  
Click the “Unplug or Eject Hardware” icon ( ) in  
the taskbar and select Stop USB Disk from the  
menu that appears.  
Windows 98 Second Edition (SE)  
In My Computer, click with the right mouse but-  
ton on the removable disk corresponding to the  
camera and select Eject from the menu that ap-  
pears.  
Macintosh  
Drag the camera volume (“NIKON D200”) into  
the Trash.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
109  
Printing Photographs  
Photographs can be printed by any of the following methods:  
• Connect the camera to a printer and print photographs directly from the cam-  
era ( 111).  
• Insert the memory card in a printer equipped with a card slot (see the printer  
manual for details). If the printer supports DPOF ( 202), photographs can be  
selected for printing using Print Set ( 139).  
• Take the memory card to a developer or digital print center. If the center sup-  
ports DPOF ( 202), photographs can be selected for printing using Print Set  
(
139).  
• Transfer the pictures using the supplied software and print them from a com-  
puter (see the software manual, on CD).  
Note that RAW photographs can only be printed by transferring them to a com-  
puter and printing them using the supplied software or Nikon Capture 4 Version  
4.4 or later (available separately).  
Printing Via Direct USB Connection  
When the camera is connected to a printer that supports PictBridge ( 202),  
photographs can be printed directly from the camera.  
Take photographs  
Select photographs for printing using Print  
Set ( 139)  
Select PTP in camera USB menu and connect camera to printer ( 121)  
Print photographs one  
by one ( 112)  
Print multiple photo-  
graphs ( 113)  
Create index prints  
113)  
(
Disconnect USB cable  
Printing Via Direct USB Connection  
Be sure the battery is fully charged or use an optional EH-6 AC adapter. When taking pho-  
tographs to be printed without modification, choose sRGB for Color Space.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
110  
Connecting the Printer  
Set the USB option in the setup menu to PTP  
1
(
121).  
Turn the printer on.  
2
3
Turn the camera off and connect the supplied  
USB cable as shown. Do not use force or at-  
tempt to insert the connectors at an angle. Con-  
nect the camera directly to the printer; do not  
connect the cable via a USB hub.  
Turn the camera on. A welcome screen will be  
displayed, followed by the PictBridge playback  
display. Proceed to “Printing Photographs One  
at a Time” ( 112) or “Printing Multiple Photo-  
graphs( 113).  
4
Press the multi selector left or right to view additional photographs, or  
press and hold the  
button to zoom in on the current photo ( 103).  
To view six photographs at a time, press the button and rotate the main  
command dial. Use the multi selector to highlight photographs, or press  
the button and rotate the main command dial to display the highlighted  
photograph full frame.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
111  
Printing Pictures One at a Time  
To print the photograph selected in the PictBridge  
playback display, press and release the  
button.  
The menu shown at right will be displayed. Press the  
multi selector up or down to highlight an option and  
press to the right to select.  
Option  
Description  
Print selected picture. To cancel and return to PictBridge playback display  
Start before all images have been printed, press  
button. PictBridge playback  
Printing display will be shown when printing is complete. Print additional pictures as  
described above or turn camera off and disconnect USB cable.  
Press multi selector up or down to choose page size  
from Printer Default (default page size for current  
printer), 3.5 x 5 in., 5 x 7 in., Hagaki, 100 x 150 mm,  
4 x 6 in., 8 x 10 in., Letter, A3, or A4, then press multi  
Page Size  
selector right to select and return to print menu.  
Menu shown at right will be displayed. Press multi se-  
lector up or down to choose number of copies (maxi-  
mum 99), then press multi selector to right to select  
and return to print menu.  
No. of  
copies  
Menu shown at right will be displayed. Press multi  
selector up or down to highlight Printer Default  
(default setting for current printer), Print with Bor-  
der (print photo with white border), or No Border,  
then press multi selector to right to select and return  
to print menu.  
Border  
Menu shown at right will be displayed. Press multi  
selector up or down to highlight Printer Default (de-  
Time fault setting for current printer), Print Time Stamp  
Stamp (print time and date of recording on photo), or No  
Time Stamp, then press multi selector to right to se-  
lect and return to print menu.  
Page Size, Border, and Time Stamp  
Choose Printer Default to print at current printer settings. Only options supported by the  
current printer can be selected.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
112  
Option  
Description  
Menu shown at right will be displayed. Press multi  
selector up or down to highlight Crop (crop photo  
for printing) or No Cropping, then press multi selec-  
tor to right.  
Cropping  
If Crop is selected, dialog shown at right will be dis-  
played; rotate main command dial to choose size of  
crop and use multi selector to choose position of  
crop. Press to return to print menu. Note that qual-  
ity may drop if small crop is printed at larger sizes.  
Printing Multiple Pictures  
To print multiple selected pictures or to create an  
index print listing all JPEG photographs as small  
thumbnail images, press the  
button. The menu  
shown at right will be displayed. Press the multi se-  
lector up or down to highlight an option and press to  
the right to select.  
Option  
Description  
Print Select Print selected pictures ( 114).  
Print current DPOF print order ( 139). Note that DPOF date and info  
options are not supported.  
Print (DPOF)  
Create index print of all JPEG photos (if memory  
card contains more than 256 photos, only 256  
photos will be printed). Press button to display  
menu shown below at right; choose page size,  
border, and time stamp options as described on  
Index Print page 112 (warning will be displayed if selected  
page size is too small). To start printing, highlight  
Start Printing and press multi selector right.  
PictBridge menu will be displayed when printing  
is complete.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
113  
Printing Selected Photographs  
Choosing Print Select in the PictBridge menu (see above) displays the menu  
shown in Step 1.  
1
2
Scroll through pictures. To display cur-  
Select current picture and set number  
rent picture full screen, press button.* of prints to 1. Selected pictures marked  
by icon.  
* To print photos in print order created with Print Set ( 139), select Print (DPOF) in  
PictBridge menu. Print order can be modified as described on this page.  
Specify number of prints (up to 99). To de-  
select picture, press multi selector down  
when number of prints is 1. Repeat steps  
1–3 to select additional pictures.  
3
Display print options. Choose page size,  
border, and time stamp options as de-  
scribed on page 112. To print selected pic-  
tures, highlight Start Printing and press  
multi selector right. PictBridge menu will  
be displayed when printing is complete.  
4
Using the Multi Selector  
The multi selector can be used at any time when the monitor is on. The focus selector  
lock switch only takes effect when the monitor is off.  
Error Messages  
If the dialog shown at right is displayed, an error has oc-  
curred. After checking the printer and resolving any prob-  
lems as directed in the printer manual, press the multi selec-  
tor up or down to highlight Continue and press the multi  
selector to the right to resume printing. Select Cancel to  
exit without printing the remaining images.  
Selecting Photographs for Printing  
NEF (RAW) photos are displayed in the Print Selected menu but can not be selected for  
printing.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
114  
Setup  
Basic Camera Settings: The Setup Menu  
The setup menu contains the following options. See “Using the Menus” ( 24)  
for more information on using the menus.  
Option  
Format  
LCD Brightness  
Mirror Lock-up*  
Video Mode  
116  
116  
117  
117  
World Time  
117  
Language  
118  
Image Comment  
Auto Image Rotation  
Recent Settings  
USB  
118  
119  
119  
121  
Dust Off Ref Photo  
Battery Info  
121–122  
123  
Firmware Version  
123  
* Not available at battery levels of  
or below or when  
camera is powered by optional MB-D200 battery pack  
equipped with AA batteries.  
Using the Multi Selector  
The multi selector can be used at any time when the monitor is on. The focus selector  
lock switch only takes effect when the monitor is off.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
115  
Format  
Memory cards must be formatted before first use. For-  
matting memory cards is also an effective way of deleting  
all pictures on the card. Selecting Format displays the fol-  
lowing options. Press the multi selector up or down to  
highlight an option and then press the button:  
Option  
Description  
No Exit without formatting memory card.  
Format memory card. Message shown at right displayed  
while formatting is in progress. Do not turn the camera  
off, remove the batteries or memory card, or unplug the AC  
adapter (available separately) until formatting is complete  
and setup menu is displayed.  
Yes  
LCD Brightness  
Press the multi selector up to increase brightness, down to  
decrease. The number to the right of the display indicates  
the current brightness level, with +2 the brightest setting  
and –2 the darkest. Press the multi selector to the right to  
complete the operation and return to the setup menu.  
Before Formatting  
Formatting memory cards permanently deletes all data they contain, including hidden and  
protected pictures and any other data that may be on the card. Before formatting, be sure  
to transfer to a computer any pictures you would like to keep.  
FAT 32  
The D200 supports FAT 32, allowing use of memory cards with capacities of over 2GB. FAT  
16 is used when reformatting cards already formatted in FAT 16.  
Two-Button Format  
Memory cards can also be formatted with the  
(
and  
) buttons ( 14).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
116  
Mirror Lock-Up  
This option is used to lock the mirror in the up position  
to allow inspection or cleaning of the low-pass filter that  
protects the image sensor. See “Technical Notes: Caring  
for the Camera( 185).  
This option is not available at battery levels of  
or below, while multiple  
exposures are being shot, or when the camera is powered by an optional MB-  
D200 battery pack using AA batteries. Use a fully-charged EN-EL3e battery or  
an optional AC adapter. If the battery runs low while the mirror is raised, a beep  
will sound and the AF-assist illuminator will blink to warn you that the mirror will  
automatically lower in about two minutes.  
Video Mode  
Before connecting your camera to a video device such as  
a television or VCR ( 106), choose a video mode setting  
that matches the video standard used in the device.  
Option  
Description  
NTSC Use when connecting camera to NTSC devices.  
Use when connecting camera to PAL devices. Note that  
PAL number of pixels in output is selectively reduced, caus-  
ing drop in resolution.  
World Time  
World Time is used to set the camera clock to the current  
date and time ( 12).  
The Clock Battery  
The clock-calendar is powered by an independent, rechargeable power source, which is  
charged as necessary when the main batteries are installed or the camera is powered by  
an optional EH-6 AC adapter. Two days of charging will power the clock for about three  
months. If the  
icon flashes in the control panel, the clock battery is exhausted and  
the clock has been reset to a time starting at 2005.01.01.00:00:00. Set the clock to the cor-  
rect date and time.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
117  
Language  
Choose the language for camera menus and messages  
from:  
De Deutsch  
En English  
Es Español  
Fr Français  
It Italiano  
German  
English  
Spanish  
French  
Italian  
Py Русский  
Sv Svenska  
Russian  
Swedish  
Traditional Chinese  
Simplified Chinese  
Japanese  
Ne Nederlands Dutch  
Korean  
Po Português  
Portuguese  
Image Comment  
Add brief text comments to photographs as they are tak-  
en. Comments can be viewed when the photographs are  
displayed using the supplied software or Nikon Capture 4  
Version 4.4 or later (available separately). The first fifteen  
letters of the comment are also visible on Shooting Data  
Page 2 in the photo information display ( 100).  
Done: Save changes and return to the setup menu.  
Input Comment: The following dialog will be displayed. Enter a comment as de-  
scribed below.  
Keyboard area: Use multi selector to highlight letters, press center  
of multi selector to select.  
Comment area: Comment appears here. To move cursor, press  
button and use multi selector.  
To delete the character at the current cursor position, press the button. To return to  
the setup menu without changing the comment, press the button.  
Comments can be up to thirty-six characters long. Any additional characters will be  
deleted.  
After editing the comment, press to return to the image comment menu.  
Attach Comment: A comment is added to all photographs taken when this option  
is checked (). Highlight this option and press the multi selector to the right to  
toggle the check mark on or off.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
118  
Auto Image Rotation  
Photographs taken while On (the default option) is se-  
lected contain information on camera orientation, allow-  
ing them to be rotated automatically during playback (  
98) or when viewed in compatible Nikon software.* The  
following orientations are recorded:  
Landscape (wide)  
orientation  
Camera rotated 90°  
clockwise  
Camera rotated 90°  
counter-clockwise  
* In continuous mode ( 26), orientation recorded for first shot applies to all images in  
same burst, even if camera orientation is changed during shooting.  
Camera orientation is not recorded when Off is selected. Choose this option  
when taking photographs with the lens pointing up or down.  
Recent Settings  
The following options are available:  
Option  
Description  
Menu shown at right is displayed. Select Yes to lock  
menu so that no items are added or removed, No to un-  
lock menu. Settings in other menus are not affected.  
Lock  
Menu  
Menu shown at right is displayed. Select Yes to delete  
all recent settings, No to exit without changing Recent  
Settings menu. This option will take effect even when  
Recent Settings are locked.  
Delete  
Recent  
Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
119  
Customizing the Recent Settings Menu  
To create a personalized menu of shooting and Custom Settings options:  
1 Select Lock Menu >No to unlock the Recent Settings menu.  
2 Select Delete Recent Settings >Yes to delete all existing  
recent settings.  
3 Select the items you wish to include in the Recent Settings  
menu from the shooting and Custom Settings menus. The  
fourteen most recently selected items will be stored.  
4 Select Lock Menu >Yes to lock the Recent Settings menu.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
120  
USB  
Before connecting the camera to a computer via USB (  
107), select the appropriate USB option as determined by  
the computer operating system and whether the camera  
is being controlled from Nikon Capture 4 Version 4.4 or  
later (available separately) or photographs are being trans-  
ferred to the computer using the supplied software:  
Operating system  
Windows XP Home Edition  
Windows XP Professional  
Mac OS X  
Supplied software  
Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control  
Choose PTP or Mass  
Storage  
Windows 2000 Professional  
Choose PTP  
Windows Millennium Edition (Me) Choose Mass Storage  
Windows 98 Second Edition (SE)  
Mac OS 9  
Not supported  
Dust Off Ref Photo  
Acquire reference data for the Image Dust Off function in  
Nikon Capture 4 Version 4.4 or later (available separately;  
for more information, see the Nikon Capture 4 User’s Man-  
ual).  
Mount a CPU lens on the camera (a lens with a focal length of at least  
50mm is recommended). The Dust Off Ref Photo option is only available  
with CPU lenses. If using a zoom lens, zoom in to the maximum telephoto  
position.  
1
Press the multi selector to the right. The message  
2
shown at right will be displayed, and  
will be dis-  
played in the control panel and viewfinder.  
To cancel the operation and return to the setup  
menu, press the button.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
121  
With the lens ten centimeters (four inches) from a bright, featureless white  
object, frame the object so that nothing else is visible in the viewfinder and  
press the shutter-release button halfway. In autofocus mode, focus will  
automatically be set to infinity; in manual focus mode, set focus to infinity  
manually before pressing the shutter-release button. If using the aperture  
ring to set aperture, choose the minimum setting (largest f/-number).  
3
4
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to acquire Image  
Dust Off reference data (note that noise reduction turns on automatically  
when the subject is poorly lit, increasing the amount of time needed to  
record the data). The monitor turns off when the shutter-release button is  
pressed.  
If the reference object is too bright or too dark, the  
camera may be unable to acquire Image Dust Off  
reference data and the message shown at right will  
be displayed. Choose another reference object and  
repeat the process from Step 1.  
Image Dust Off  
The Image Dust Off feature in Nikon Capture 4 Version 4.4 or later (available separately)  
processes NEF (RAW) photographs to remove the effects of dust in the camera imaging  
system by comparing the images to the data acquired with Dust Off Ref Photo. It is  
not available with JPEG images. The same reference data can be used for NEF (RAW)  
photographs taken with different lenses or at different apertures.  
Image Dust Off Reference Data  
Reference images can not be viewed using computer imaging  
software. A grid pattern is displayed when reference images are  
viewed on the camera.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
122  
Battery Info  
View information on the EN-EL3e rechargeable Li-ion bat-  
tery currently inserted in the camera.  
Option  
Bat. Meter Current battery level as a percentage.  
Number of times shutter has been released with current battery since bat-  
Description  
tery was last charged. Note that camera may sometimes release shutter  
without recording photograph, for example when measuring value for  
preset white balance.  
Pic. Meter  
Five-level display showing battery age. 0 (New) indicates that battery per-  
Charg. Life formance has not been affected; 4 (Replace) indicates that battery has  
reached end of charging life and should be replaced.  
Firmware Version  
View the camera firmware version. Press the multi selector  
to the left to return to the setup menu.  
The MB-D200 Battery Pack  
The following information is shown when the camera is powered by an MB-D200 battery  
pack:  
MB-D200 contains EN-EL3e batteries: Information for each battery is listed separately.  
MB-D200 contains six AA batteries: Battery Info can not be selected.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
123  
Shooting Options: The Shooting Menu  
The shooting menu contains the following options. See “Using the Menus” (  
24) for more information on using the menus.  
Option  
Shooting Menu Bank  
Menu Reset  
125–126  
126  
128  
129  
129  
129  
129  
130  
130  
130  
130  
131  
131  
132  
132  
132  
132  
132  
Folders  
File Naming  
Optimize Image  
Color Space  
Image Quality*  
Image Size*  
JPEG Compression  
RAW Compression  
White Balance*  
Long Exp. NR  
High ISO NR  
ISO Sensitivity*  
Image Overlay  
Multiple Exposure  
Intvl Timer Shooting  
Non-CPU Lens Data  
* Reset to defaults when a two-button reset is performed  
97).  
(
Using the Multi Selector  
The multi selector can be used at any time when the monitor is on. The focus selector  
lock switch only takes effect when the monitor is off.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
124  
Shooting Menu Bank  
All shooting menu options are stored in one of four banks.  
Changes to settings in one bank have no effect on the oth-  
ers. To store a particular combination of frequently-used  
settings, select one of the four banks (the default bank is  
bank A) and set the camera to these settings. The new  
settings will be stored in the bank even when the camera  
is turned off, and will be restored the next time the bank is selected. Different  
combinations of settings can be stored in the other banks, allowing the user to  
switch instantly from one combination to another by selecting the appropriate  
bank from the bank menu.  
The default names for the four shooting menu banks are A, B, C, and D. A descrip-  
tive caption can be added using the Rename option.  
Shooting Menu Bank  
The control panel shows the bank currently selected in the  
shooting menu bank menu.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
125  
Renaming Shooting Menu Banks  
Highlight Rename and press the multi selector to the right.  
1
2
A list of shooting menu banks will be displayed. High-  
light the desired bank and press the multi selector to  
the right.  
The following dialog will be displayed. Enter a name as described below.  
3
Keyboard area: Use multi selector to highlight letters, press  
center of multi selector to select.  
Name area: Name appears here. To move cursor, press but-  
ton and use multi selector.  
To delete the character at the current cursor position, press the button. To return  
to the shooting menu without changing the bank name, press the button.  
Bank names can be up to twenty characters long. Any characters after the twentieth  
will be deleted.  
After editing the name, press to return to the bank menu.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
126  
Menu Reset  
To restore default settings for the current shooting menu  
bank ( 125), highlight Yes and press the multi selector  
to the right (select No to exit without changing settings).  
The following settings are affected:  
Option  
File naming  
Default  
DSC  
Option  
Multiple exposure3  
Default  
Optimize Image  
Color space  
Normal  
sRGB  
JPEG Normal  
Large  
Size Priority  
NEF (RAW)  
Auto2  
Off  
On (Normal)  
100  
Number of shots  
Auto gain  
Interval timer shooting4  
2
On  
Image quality1  
Image size1  
Start time  
Interval  
No. of intervals  
No. of shots  
Start  
Now  
00:01´:00˝  
JPEG compression  
RAW compression  
White balance1  
Long Exp. NR  
High ISO NR  
1
1
Off  
ISO sensitivity1  
Non-CPU lens data  
Focal length  
Maximum aperture  
N/A  
N/A  
1 Defaults can also be restored by performing two-button reset ( 97).  
2 Fine tuning reset to 0.  
3 Applies to all banks. Menu Reset can not be selected while shooting is in progress.  
4 Applies to all banks. Shooting ends when reset is performed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
127  
Folders  
Select the folder in which subsequent images will be  
stored.  
Option  
Description  
Dialog shown at right will be displayed; press multi selec-  
tor up or down to choose number for new folder. Press  
New multi selector to right to create new folder and return to  
shooting menu. Subsequent photographs will be stored  
in new folder.  
List of existing folders will be displayed; press multi selec-  
Select tor up or down to highlight folder, press to right to select  
Folder and return to shooting menu. Subsequent photographs  
will be stored in selected folder.  
Creating a Folder at Startup  
If the button is pressed when the camera is turned on, a new folder will be created  
by adding one to the current folder number. No folder will be created if the current  
folder is empty.  
Number of Folders  
Additional time may be required for recording and playback if the memory card contains a  
very large number of folders.  
Automatic Folder Creation  
If the current folder contains 999 files, or if sequential file numbering ( 159) is on and the  
current folder contains a picture numbered 9999, the camera will automatically create a  
new folder for the next picture by adding one to the current folder number. If the memory  
card already contains a folder numbered 999, the shutter release will be disabled. If se-  
quential file numbering is on, the shutter release will also be disabled if the current folder  
is numbered 999 and contains a picture numbered 9999. To continue shooting, create a  
folder with a number less than 999, or select an existing folder with a number less than 999  
and less than 999 images.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
128  
File Naming  
Photographs are saved using file names consisting of  
“DSC_” or “_DSC” followed by a four-digit file number and  
a three-letter extension (e.g., “DSC_0001.JPG”). The File  
Naming option is used to change theDSC”portion of the  
fi le name. Press the multi selector to the right to display  
the dialog shown below.  
Keyboard area: Use multi selector to highlight letters, press center  
of multi selector to select.  
Prefix area: File name prefix appears here. To move cursor left or  
right, press button and use multi selector.  
To delete the character at the current cursor position, press the button. To return to  
the shooting menu without changing the file naming rule, press the button.  
After editing the file name prefix, press to return to the shooting menu. New photo-  
graphs will be saved using the new file naming rule.  
Optimize Image  
Optimize color, contrast, sharpness, saturation, and hue or  
take photos in black-and-white. See “Reference: Optimiz-  
ing Images( 45).  
Color Space  
Choose from sRGB and Adobe RGB color spaces. SeeRef-  
erence: Color Space( 50).  
Image Quality  
Seven options are available for image quality. See “Refer-  
ence: Image Quality and Size( 28).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
129  
Image Size  
Image size can be selected from Large, Medium, and  
Small. SeeReference: Image Quality and Size( 32).  
JPEG Compression  
Choose whether to compress JPEG images to a fixed size  
or to vary file size for improved image quality. See “Refer-  
ence: Image Quality and Size( 30).  
RAW Compression  
Choose whether to compress NEF (RAW) images. SeeRef-  
erence: Image Quality and Size( 31).  
White Balance  
Nine options are available for white balance. See “Refer-  
ence: White Balance( 35).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
130  
Long Exp. NR  
Select On to reduce“noise”in the form of randomly-spaced,  
brightly-colored pixels in photographs taken at shutter  
speeds of 8s or slower.  
Option  
Off  
(default)  
Description  
Noise reduction off; camera functions normally.  
Photos taken at shutter speeds of about 8s or slower are  
processed to reduce noise, increasing recording time by  
about50–100%andhalvingnumberofimagesthatcanbe  
stored in memory buffer. During processing,  
On  
blinksinshutter-speed/aperturedisplays. Nextphotocan  
be taken when  
is no longer displayed. Note that if photographs  
are played back during processing, the image displayed in the monitor may not  
show the effects of noise reduction.  
High ISO NR  
Photographs taken at high sensitivities can be processed  
to reducenoise. Choose from the following options:  
Option  
Description  
On (Normal) Noise reduction takes effect at ISO sensitivities of 400 or above or if ISO  
(default) sensitivity is raised to 400 or higher when On is selected for Custom Set-  
On (Low) ting b1 (ISO Auto). Select Normal or High for increased noise reduction.  
On (High) Noise reduction is increased at ISO sensitivities over 1600.  
Noise reduction turns off at ISO sensitivities of 800 or below. Minimal  
noise reduction is performed at ISO sensitivities over 800.  
Off  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
131  
ISO Sensitivity  
ISO sensitivity can be increased from the default value  
(100). ISO sensitivities over 1600 are only available when  
Custom Setting b1 (ISO Auto) is off. See “Reference: Sen-  
sitivity (ISO Equivalency)( 33).  
Image Overlay  
Create a new image by superimposing two existing RAW  
photographs. The RAW photographs must have been cre-  
ated using the D200 and be on the same memory card.  
See “Reference: Image Overlay and Multiple Exposure” (  
84).  
Multiple Exposure  
Create a single photograph from two to ten exposures.  
See “Reference: Image Overlay and Multiple Exposure” (  
86).  
Interval Timer Shooting  
Take photographs automatically at pre-selected intervals.  
SeeReference: Interval Timer Photography( 89).  
Non-CPU Lens Data  
Specifying the focal length and maximum aperture allows  
such features as color matrix metering, aperture value  
display, and balanced fill flash to be used with non-CPU  
lenses. SeeReference: Non-CPU Lenses( 93).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
132  
Playback Options: The Playback Menu  
The playback menu contains the following options. See “Using the Menus” (  
24) for more information on using the menus.  
Option  
Delete  
Playback Folder  
Slide Show  
Hide Image  
Print Set  
Display Mode  
Image Review  
After Delete  
Rotate Tall  
133–134  
135  
135–136  
137–138  
139–140  
141  
141  
142  
142  
The playback menu is only displayed if there is a  
memory card in the camera.  
Delete  
The delete menu contains the following options.  
Option  
Selected Delete selected photographs.  
All Delete all photographs.  
Description  
Using the Multi Selector  
The multi selector can be used at any time when the monitor is on. The focus selector  
lock switch only takes effect when the monitor is off.  
Protected and Hidden Images  
Images marked with a  
icon are protected and can not be deleted. Hidden images (  
137) are not displayed in the thumbnail list and can not be selected for deletion.  
High-Capacity Memory Cards  
If the memory card contains a large number of files or folders and the number of pictures to  
be deleted is very large, deletion can sometimes take more than half an hour.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
133  
Deleting Selected Photographs: Selected  
Choosing Selected displays the photographs in the folder or folders selected in  
the Playback Folder menu ( 135) as small thumbnail images.  
1
2
Highlight image. (To view highlighted  
image full screen, press . Release to  
return to thumbnail list.)  
Select highlighted image. Selected im-  
age marked by icon.  
Repeat steps 1 and 2 to select additional pictures. To deselect picture, highlight  
and press center of multi selector. To exit without deleting pictures, press but-  
ton.  
3
4
Confirmation dialog displayed. Press multi  
selector up or down to highlight option,  
press to select.  
Yes: delete selected pictures  
No: exit without deleting images  
Deleting All Photographs: All  
Choosing All displays the confirmation dialog shown at  
right. Press the multi selector up or down to highlight an  
option, then press the button to make a selection.  
Yes: delete all images in the folder or folders selected in  
the Playback Folder menu ( 135). Pictures that are  
protected or hidden will not be deleted.  
No: exit without deleting images.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
134  
Playback Folder  
Choose a folder for playback.  
Option  
Description  
ND200 Images in all folders created by the D200 will be visible during playback.  
Images in all folders created by cameras that conform to the Design Rule for  
All Camera File System (DCF)—all Nikon digital cameras and most other makes of  
digital camera—will be visible during playback.  
Only images in folder currently selected using Folders option in shooting  
menu are displayed during playback.  
Current  
Slide Show  
To play images back one after the other in an automated  
“slide show,” highlight Start in the slide show menu and  
press the multi selector right. All photographs in the  
folder or folders selected in the Playback Folder menu  
will be played back in the order recorded, with a pause  
between each image. Hidden photographs ( 137) will  
not be played back.  
Selecting a Folder for Storage  
The Folders option in the shooting menu is used to create new folders and to select the  
folder in which subsequent photographs will be stored ( 128).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
135  
The following operations can be performed during a slide show:  
To  
Use  
Description  
Go forward or  
back one frame  
Press multi selector left to return to previous frame, right to  
skip to next frame.  
Press multi selector up or down to change photo info dis-  
played during slide show.  
View photo info  
Pause  
Exit to playback  
menu  
Press to pause slide show.  
Press to end slide show and display playback menu.  
Exit to playback  
mode  
Press to end slide show and return to playback with current  
image displayed in monitor.  
Exit to shooting Shutter Press shutter-release button halfway to end slide show, turn  
mode release monitor off, and return to shooting mode.  
The dialog shown at right is displayed when the show  
ends or when the button is pressed to pause playback.  
Press the multi selector up or down to highlight an option,  
then press to the right to make a selection.  
Restart: Resume slide show.  
Frame Interval: Change the length of time each picture  
is displayed.  
Exit: End slide show and return to the playback menu.  
To exit the slide show and return to the playback menu, press the multi selector  
to the left or press the button.  
Changing the Display Interval: Frame Interval  
To change the time each image is displayed, highlight  
Frame Interval in the Slide Show or pause menu and  
press the multi selector right. Press the multi selector up  
or down to highlight the appropriate option and then  
press the multi selector to the right to return to the previ-  
ous menu.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
136  
Hide Image  
The Hide Image option is used to hide or reveal selected  
photographs. Hidden images are visible only in the Hide  
Image menu, and can only be deleted by formatting the  
memory card.  
Option  
Description  
Select/Set Hide or reveal selected photographs.  
Deselect All? Reveal all photographs.  
Hiding Selected Photographs: Select/Set  
Choosing Select/Set displays the photographs in the folder or folders selected  
in the Playback Folder menu ( 135) as small thumbnail images.  
1
2
Highlight image. (To view highlighted  
Select highlighted image. Selected im-  
image full screen, press . Release to  
return to thumbnail list.)  
age marked by  
icon.  
Repeat steps 1 and 2 to select addi-  
3
4
tional pictures. To deselect picture,  
highlight and press center of multi  
selector. To exit without changing  
hidden status of pictures, press  
button.  
Complete operation and return to play-  
back menu.  
File Attributes for Hidden Images  
Hidden images have “hidden” and “read-only” status when viewed on a Windows com-  
puter. In the case of “NEF+JPEG” images, this marking applies to both the NEF (RAW)  
and JPEG image.  
Protected and Hidden Images  
Revealing an image that is both hidden and protected will simultaneously remove protec-  
tion from the image.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
137  
Revealing All Photographs: Deselect All  
Choosing Deselect All? displays the confirmation dialog  
shown at right. Press the multi selector up or down to  
highlight an option, then press the  
selection.  
button to make a  
Yes: reveal all images in the folder or folders selected in  
the Playback Folder menu ( 135). The monitor will  
briefly show the message “Deselect All Done,” and then  
the playback menu will be displayed.  
No: exit to the playback menu without changing the hidden status of images.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
138  
Print Set  
P rint Set is used to create a digital “print order” that lists  
the photographs to be printed, the number of copies, and  
the information to be included on each print. This infor-  
mation is stored on the memory card in Digital Print Order  
Format (DPOF). The card can then be removed from the  
camera and used to print the selected images printed on  
any DPOF-compatible device.  
Option  
Description  
Select/Set Select photographs for printing.  
Deselect All? Remove all images from print order.  
Exif version 2.21  
The D200 supports Exif (Exchangeable Image File Format for Digital Still Cameras) ver-  
sion 2.21, a standard that allows information stored with photographs to be used for  
optimal color reproduction when images are output on Exif-compliant printers.  
DPOF/PictBridge  
Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) is an industry-wide standard that allows pictures to  
be printed from print orders stored on the memory card. Before printing, check that  
the printer or print service supports DPOF. Pictures selected using Print Set can also  
be printed on PictBridge printers via direct USB connection ( 110). When a PictBridge  
printer is connected to the camera using the supplied UC-E4 USB cable, a menu will be  
displayed in the camera monitor; select Print (DPOF) to print the current print order.  
Note that the date and shooting information will not be printed.  
Print Set  
Print Set will not be available if there is not enough space on the memory card to record  
the print order. Delete unwanted pictures and try again.  
NEF Images  
Images created at image quality settings of NEF (RAW) ( 28) can not be selected for  
printing using this option.  
After Creating a Print Order  
After creating a print order, do not change the hidden status of images in the print order  
or use a computer or other device to delete images. Either action could cause problems  
during printing.  
Taking Pictures for Direct Printing  
When taking images to be printed without modification, set the Color Space option in the  
shooting menu to sRGB ( 50).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
139  
Modifying the Print Order: Select/Set  
Choosing Select/Set displays the photographs in the folder or folders selected  
in the Playback Folder menu ( 135) as small thumbnail images.  
Highlight image. (To view highlighted im-  
age full screen, press . Release to return  
to thumbnail list.)  
1
Press button and press multi selector up  
or down to specify number of prints (up  
to 99), or press center of multi selector to  
select image and set number of prints to 1.  
Selected images are marked by icon.  
2
Repeat steps 1 and 2 to select additional pictures. To deselect picture, press multi  
selector up or down until icon is no longer displayed. To exit without changing  
print order, press button.  
3
Return to Print Set menu. To select or dese-  
lect options, highlight and press multi se-  
lector to right. Selected items are marked  
4
with a .  
Data Imprint: Print shutter speed and aperture on all pictures in print order.  
Imprint Date: Print date of recording on all pictures in print order.  
To complete print order and return to playback menu, highlight Done and press multi  
selector to right. To exit without altering print order, press button.  
Removing All Images from the Print Order: Deselect All  
Choosing Deselect All? displays the confirmation dialog  
shown at right. Press the multi selector up or down to  
highlight an option, then press the  
selection.  
button to make a  
Yes: remove all images from the print order. The moni-  
tor will briefly show the messageDeselect All Done,and  
then the playback menu will be displayed.  
No: exit to the playback menu without changing the print order.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
140  
Display Mode  
To choose the information listed in the photo-information  
display ( 99), highlight the desired option and press the  
multi selector right. A appears next to selected items;  
to deselect, highlight and press the multi selector to the  
right. To return to the playback menu, highlight Done and  
press the multi selector to the right.  
Option  
Description  
Data*  
Shooting data appears in photo information display.  
Histogram* Histogram appears in photo information display.  
Highlight*  
Highlight page appears in photo information display.  
RGB Histogram* RGB histogram appears in photo information display.  
Active focus area (if single-servo AF is used with dynamic-area AF,  
Focus Area group dynamic-AF, or closest-subject priority, area where focus first  
locked) is shown in red in photo information display.  
* Default selection.  
Image Review  
Image Review controls whether or not photographs are  
displayed in the monitor immediately after shooting.  
Option  
Description  
Photographs are not automatically displayed af-  
ter shooting.  
Off (default)  
Photographs are automatically displayed after  
shooting.  
On  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
141  
After Delete  
Choose whether the following or previous picture is dis-  
played after an image is deleted.  
Option  
Description  
After image is deleted, following image is displayed or highlighted in  
thumbnail list. If deleted image was last frame in memory, previous frame  
will be displayed or highlighted.  
Show Next  
(default)  
After image is deleted, previous image is displayed or highlighted in thumb-  
nail list. If deleted image was first frame in memory, following frame will be  
displayed or highlighted.  
Show  
Previous  
If user was scrolling through images in order recorded before deletion, fol-  
lowing image will be displayed or highlighted (if deleted image was last  
Continue frame in memory, previous frame will be displayed or highlighted). If user  
as Before was scrolling through images in reverse order, previous image will be dis-  
played or highlighted (if deleted image was first frame in memory, following  
frame will be displayed or highlighted).  
Rotate Tall  
Choose whether photographs taken in “tall” (portrait) ori-  
entation are automatically rotated for display in the moni-  
tor.  
Option  
Description  
Tall” (portrait) orientation photos taken with On selected for Auto Image Ro-  
tation ( 119) are displayed in tall orientation during playback (tall orientation  
images are displayed at 2/3 size of other images to fit monitor).  
On  
(default)  
Off Tallphotos are displayed inwide(landscape) orientation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
142  
Custom Settings  
Custom settings are used to fine-tune a variety of camera settings to suit the  
user’s preferences, creating combinations of settings that differ from the factory  
defaults in effect at the time your camera was purchased. In addition to Custom  
Settings C (Bank Select) and R (Menu Reset), settings in the Custom Settings  
menu are divided into the following six groups:  
Group  
Autofocus  
Custom Settings  
a1–a10  
b1–b7  
a
b
c
d
e
f
Metering/Exposure  
Timers/AE&AF Lock  
Shooting/Display  
Bracketing/Flash  
Controls  
c1–c5  
d1–d8  
e1–e8  
f1–f7  
Press the multi selector up or down to highlight the desired group and then  
press the multi selector to the right. The full list of Custom Settings a1–f7 will be  
displayed, starting with the settings in the selected group. To select a setting in  
a different group, press the multi selector up or down scroll until the desired set-  
ting is displayed, or press the multi selector to the left to return the top menu and  
select a different group. Custom Setting a1 (AF-C Mode Priority) and f7 (No  
Memory Card?) are linked: pressing the multi selector up when Custom Setting  
a1 is highlighted displays Custom Setting f7, while pressing the multi selector  
down while Custom Setting f7 is highlighted displays Custom Setting a1.  
Using the Multi Selector  
The multi selector can be used at any time when the monitor is on. The focus selector  
lock switch only takes effect when the monitor is off.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
143  
The following Custom Settings are available:  
Custom Setting  
C
R
a
Bank Select  
Menu Reset  
Autofocus  
Custom Setting Bank  
Reset Custom Setting Menu  
146  
147  
a1 AF-C Mode Priority  
a2 AF-S Mode Priority  
a3 Focus Area Frame  
a4 Group Dynamic AF  
a5 Lock-On  
a6 AF Activation  
a7 AF Area Illumination  
a8 Focus Area  
AF-C Mode Priority Selection  
AF-S Mode Priority Selection  
Focus Area Frame Selection  
Pattern Selection in Group Dynamic AF  
Focus Tracking with Lock-On  
AF Activation  
148  
148  
148  
149–150  
150  
151  
AF Area Illumination  
Focus Area Selection  
151  
151  
a9 AF Assist  
Built-in AF-Assist Illuminator  
AF-ON Button for MB-D200 Battery Pack  
152  
152  
a10 AF-ON for MB-D200  
Metering/Exposure  
b1 ISO Auto  
b2 ISO Step Value  
b3 EV Step  
b4 Exp Comp/Fine Tune  
b5 Exposure comp.  
b6 Center-Weighted  
b7 Fine Tune Exposure  
Timers/AE&AF Lock  
c1 AE Lock  
b
ISO Sensitivity Auto Control  
ISO Sensitivity Step Value  
EV Steps for Exposure Control  
Steps for Exposure Comp and Fine Tuning  
Easy Exposure Compensation  
Center-Weighted Area  
152–153  
154  
154  
154  
155  
155  
156  
Fine Tune Optimal Exposure  
c
AE Lock Buttons  
156  
156–157  
157  
c2 AE-L/AF-L  
c3 Auto Meter-Off  
c4 Self-Timer  
Assignment of AE-L/AF-L Button  
Auto Meter-Off Delay  
Self-Timer Delay  
157  
c5 Monitor-Off  
Monitor-Off Delay  
157  
d
Shooting/Display  
d1 Beep  
Beep  
158  
158  
158  
158  
158  
159  
159  
160  
d2 Grid Display  
Viewfinder Grid Display  
Viewfinder Warning Display  
CL-Mode Shooting Speed  
Exposure Delay Mode  
File Number Sequence  
LCD Illumination  
d3 Viewfinder Warning  
d4 Shooting Speed  
d5 Exp. Delay Mode  
d6 File No. Sequence  
d7 Illumination  
d8 MB-D200 Batteries  
MB-D200 Battery Type  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
144  
Custom Setting  
e
Bracketing/Flash  
e1 Flash Sync Speed  
e2 Flash Shutter Speed  
e3 Built-in Flash  
e4 Modeling Flash  
e5 Auto BKT Set  
Flash Sync Speed Setting  
Slowest Speed When Using Flash  
Built-in Flash Mode  
Preview Button Activates Modeling Flash  
Auto Bracketing Set  
160  
161  
161–166  
166  
166  
e6 Manual Mode Bkting  
e7 Auto BKT Order  
e8 Auto BKT Selection  
Controls  
Auto Bracketing in M Exposure Mode  
Auto Bracketing Order  
Auto Bracketing Selection Method  
167  
167  
167  
f
f1 Center Button  
f2 Multi-Selector  
f3 Photo Info/Playback  
f4 FUNC. Button  
Multi-Selector Center Button  
168  
169  
169  
When Multi-Selector is Pressed;  
Role of Multi-Selector in full-frame Playback  
Assign FUNC. Button  
170  
f5 Command Dials  
f6 Buttons and Dials  
f7 No Memory Card?  
Customize Command Dials  
Setting Method for Buttons and Dials  
Disable Shutter If No Memory Card  
170–171  
172  
172  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
145  
Custom Setting C: Custom Setting Bank  
Custom Settings are stored in one of four banks. Changes  
to settings in one bank have no effect on the others. To  
store a particular combination of frequently-used settings,  
select one of the four banks and set the camera to these  
settings. The new settings will be stored in the bank even  
when the camera is turned off, and will be restored the  
next time the bank is selected. Different combinations of settings can be stored  
in the other banks, allowing the user to switch instantly from one combination to  
another by selecting the appropriate bank from the bank menu.  
The default names for the four Custom Settings banks are A, B, C, and D. A de-  
scriptive caption can be added using the Rename option as described in “The  
Shooting Menu: Shooting Menu Bank( 125).  
Custom Settings Bank  
If settings in the current bank have been modified from default  
values, the control panel display will show CUSTOM and the let-  
ter of the bank. An asterisk will be displayed next to the altered  
settings in the second level of the Custom Settings menu.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
146  
Custom Setting R: Reset Custom Setting Menu  
To restore default settings for the current Custom Settings  
bank ( 146), highlight Yes and press the multi selector to  
the right (select No to exit without changing settings).  
Custom Setting  
a1 AF-C Mode Priority  
a2 AF-S Mode Priority  
a3 Focus Area Frame  
a4 Group Dynamic AF  
a5 Lock-On  
a6 AF Activation  
a7 AF Area Illumination  
a8 Focus Area  
Default  
FPS rate  
Focus  
Custom Setting  
e1 Flash Sync Speed  
e2 Flash Shutter Speed  
e3 Built-in Flash  
e4 Modeling Flash  
e5 Auto BKT Set  
e6 Manual Mode Bkting  
e7 Auto BKT Order  
e8 Auto BKT Selection  
f1 Center Button  
Shooting mode  
Default  
1/250 s  
1/60 s  
TTL  
On  
Normal Frame (11 Areas)  
Pattern 1/Center Area  
Normal  
Shutter/AF-ON  
AE & Flash  
Flash/Speed  
MTR>Under>Over  
Manual Value Select  
Auto  
No Wrap  
On  
a9 AF Assist  
a10 AF-ON for MB-D200  
b1 ISO Auto  
AF-ON+Focus Area  
Center AF Area  
Thumbnail On/Off  
Off  
Playback Mode  
b2 ISO Step Value  
b3 EV Step  
1/3 Step  
1/3 Step  
1/3 Step  
Off  
f2 Multi-Selector  
f3 Photo Info/Playback  
f4 FUNC. Button  
f5 Command Dials  
Rotate Direction  
Do Nothing  
Info ▲▼/PB  
FV Lock  
b4 Exp Comp/Fine Tune  
b5 Exposure comp.  
b6 Center-Weighted  
b7 Fine Tune Exposure  
c1 AE Lock  
c2 AE-L/AF-L  
c3 Auto Meter-Off  
c4 Self-Timer  
φ 8 mm  
Normal  
0*  
Change Main/Sub  
Aperture Setting  
Menus and Playback  
Off  
Sub-command Dial  
Off  
AE-L/AF-L Button  
AE/AF Lock  
6 s  
10 s  
20 s  
f6 Buttons and Dials  
f7 No Memory Card?  
Default  
Disable Shutter  
c5 Monitor-Off  
d1 Beep  
d2 Grid Display  
High  
Off  
On  
3 fps  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Two-Button Reset  
Custom Settings are not reset when a two-  
button reset is performed ( 97).  
d3 Viewfinder Warning  
d4 Shooting Speed  
d5 Exp. Delay Mode  
d6 File No. Sequence  
d7 Illumination  
d8 MB-D200 Batteries  
LR6 (AA-size Alkaline)  
* Applies to all metering methods.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
147  
Custom Setting a1: AF-C Mode Priority Selection  
This option controls whether photographs can be taken  
whenever the shutter-release button is pressed (release  
priority) or only when the camera is in focus (focus priority)  
in continuous-servo AF.  
Option  
Description  
FPS Rate  
(default)  
Photos can be taken whenever shutter-release button is pressed.  
FPS Rate Photos can be taken even when camera is not in focus. In continuous mode,  
+ AF frame rate slows for improved focus if subject is dark or low contrast.  
Photos can only be taken when in-focus indicator () is displayed. Note that  
focus does not lock when in-focus indicator is displayed.  
Focus  
Custom Setting a2: AF-S Mode Priority Selection  
This option controls whether photographs can be taken  
only when the camera is in focus (focus priority) or when-  
ever the shutter-release button is pressed (release priority)  
in single-servo AF. Regardless of the setting chosen, focus  
will lock when the in-focus indicator () is displayed.  
Option  
Focus  
(default)  
Description  
Photos can only be taken when in-focus indicator () is displayed.  
Release Photos can be taken whenever shutter-release button is pressed.  
Custom Setting a3: Focus Area Frame Selection  
At the default setting of Normal Frame (11 Areas), the  
camera offers a choice of eleven focus areas. Select Wide  
Frame (7 Areas) for wider focus areas when  
(single-  
area AF) or  
(dynamic-area AF) is selected for AF-area  
mode ( 54).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
148  
Custom Setting a4: Pattern Selection in Group Dynamic AF  
This option controls how focus areas are grouped in group  
dynamic-AF ( 54) and whether the camera gives prior-  
ity to the subject in the center focus area of the selected  
group.  
Option  
Description  
Focus areas are grouped in pattern 1 ( 150). Camera focuses on sub-  
ject in center focus area of selected group. Because camera does not  
have to select focus area, less time is required for focus operation. If  
subject moves out of center focus area, camera will focus based on  
information from other focus areas in same group. Center focus area  
of selected group is highlighted in control panel.  
Pattern 1/  
Center Area  
(default)  
Focus areas are grouped in pattern 1 ( 150). Camera automatically  
selects focus area containing subject closest to camera in current fo-  
Pattern 1/  
Closest Subject cus area group. If subject moves out of selected focus area, camera  
will focus based on information from other focus areas in same group.  
Pattern 2/  
As for Pattern 1/Center Area, except that focus areas are grouped in  
Center Area pattern 2 ( 150).  
Pattern 2/  
As for Pattern 1/Closest Subject, except that focus areas are grouped  
Closest Subject in pattern 2 ( 150).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
149  
Focus areas are grouped as follows (illustrations show the control panel display):  
Pattern 1  
Pattern 2*  
Top  
Top  
Left Center 1 Center 2 Right  
Bottom  
Center  
Area  
Left  
Center Right  
Bottom  
Top  
Top  
Left Center 1 Center 2 Right  
Bottom  
Closest  
Subject  
Left  
Center Right  
Bottom  
* The center focus-area group is selected by pressing the center of the multi selector once  
to activate the current center focus-area group and then pressing the center of the multi  
selector to toggle between “center 1” and “center 2. “Center 2” is only available when  
Center AF Area is selected for Center Button (Custom Setting f1)>Shooting Mode.  
Custom Setting a5: Focus Tracking with Lock-On  
This option controls how autofocus adjusts to sudden  
large changes in the distance to the subject.  
Option  
Description  
Long  
Camera waits before adjusting focus when distance to subject changes  
Normal abruptly. Prevents camera from refocusing when subject is briefly obscured by  
(default) objects passing through frame. Select Long to increase length of time before  
camera refocuses, Short to reduce.  
Short  
Camera immediately adjusts focus when distance to subject changes abruptly.  
Off Use when photographing series of subjects at varying distances in quick suc-  
cession.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
150  
Custom Setting a6: AF Activation  
This option controls whether both the shutter-release but-  
ton and the AF-ON button can be used to initiate autofocus  
or whether autofocus is only initiated when the AF-ON but-  
ton is pressed.  
Option  
Shutter/AF-ON Autofocus can be performed with AF-ON button or by pressing shutter-  
(default) release button halfway.  
Description  
AF-ON Only Autofocus can only be performed with AF-ON button.  
Custom Setting a7: AF Area Illumination  
This option controls whether or not the active focus area is  
highlighted in red in the viewfinder.  
Option  
Description  
Auto Selected focus area is automatically highlighted as needed to provide contrast  
(default) with background.  
Off Selected focus area is not highlighted.  
Selected focus area is always highlighted, regardless of brightness of back-  
On ground. Depending on brightness of background, selected focus area may be  
difficult to see.  
Custom Setting a8: Focus Area Selection  
At the default setting of No Wrap, the focus-area display  
is bounded by the outer focus areas so that, for example,  
pressing the multi selector up when the top focus area is  
selected has no effect. Select Wrap to allow focus-area  
selection to “wrap aroundfrom top to bottom, bottom to  
top, right to left, and left to right.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
151  
Custom Setting a9: Built-in AF-Assist Illuminator  
At the default setting of On, the built-in AF-assist illumina-  
tor lights to assist the focus operation when the subject is  
poorly lit ( 58). Select Off to turn the illuminator off.  
Custom Setting a10: AF-ON Button for MB-D200 Battery Pack  
This option controls the function assigned to the AF-ON  
button for the optional MB-D200 battery pack ( 181).  
Option  
Description  
AF-ON+ AF-ON button on battery pack performs same function as camera AF-ON  
Focus Area button. Focus area can be selected by pressing AF-ON button on MB-D200  
(default)  
and rotating sub-command dial.  
AF-ON button on battery pack performs same function as camera AF-ON  
button.  
AF-ON  
AF-ON button on battery pack performs same function as camera AE-L/AF-L  
button. Focus area can be selected by pressing AF-ON button on MB-D200  
and rotating sub-command dial.  
AE/AF-L+  
Focus Area  
AF-ON button on battery pack performs same function as camera AE-L/AF-L  
button.  
AE/AF-L  
Focus area can be selected by pressing AF-ON button on MB-D200 and  
rotating sub-command dial.  
Focus Area  
Same as AF-ON button on battery pack performs function currently assigned to  
FUNC button camera FUNC. button using Custom Setting f4 (FUNC. Button; 170)  
Custom Setting b1: ISO Sensitivity Auto Control  
If On is selected for this option, the camera will automati-  
cally adjust ISO sensitivity when necessary to help ensure  
optimal exposure. This option is not available at ISO sen-  
sitivities over 1600.  
High ISO NR ( 131)  
Noise is more likely to appear in photographs taken at higher sensitivities. To reduce noise  
at sensitivities of ISO 400 equivalent and above, turn on the High ISO NR option in the  
shooting menu.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
152  
Option  
Description  
Off  
ISO sensitivity remains fixed at value selected by user, regardless of whether  
(default) optimal exposure can be achieved at current exposure settings.  
If optimal exposure can not be achieved at ISO sensitivity selected by user,  
ISO sensitivity is adjusted to compensate, to minimum approximately equiv-  
alent to ISO 200 and maximum selected using Max. Sensitivity option.  
Flash level is adjusted appropriately when flash is used. In exposure modes  
P and A, ISO sensitivity will be adjusted if photo would be overexposed at  
On  
shutter speed of 1  
8,000 or underexposed at value selected for Min. Shutter  
/
Speed. Otherwise camera adjusts ISO sensitivity when limits of exposure  
metering system are exceeded (mode S) or when optimum exposure can  
not be achieved at shutter speed and aperture selected by user (mode M).  
ISO sensitivity can not be set to values over 1600 while this option is in ef-  
fect.  
Menu shown at right is displayed. Highlight desired  
ISO value and press multi selector right to return to  
ISO auto menu.  
Max.  
Sensitivity  
Min.  
Menu shown at right is displayed. Highlight desired  
Shutter shutter speed and press multi selector right to return  
Speed to ISO auto menu.  
When On is selected, the control panel and viewfinder  
show ISO-AUTO. When sensitivity is altered from the value  
selected by the user, these indicators blink and the altered  
value is shown in the viewfinder (the indicators do not  
blink if a flash is used).  
ISO Auto > On  
When a flash is used, foreground subjects may be underexposed in photos taken at slow  
shutter speeds, in daylight, or against a bright background. Choose a flash mode other  
than slow sync or select mode A or M and choose a larger aperture.  
If a shooting menu bank in which ISO sensitivity has been set to a value greater than 1600 is  
chosen after On is selected, ISO sensitivity will not be adjusted automatically. ISO sensitiv-  
ity will also not be adjusted automatically if a Custom Settings bank in which On is selected  
is chosen after ISO sensitivity has been set to a value over 1600.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
153  
Custom Setting b2: ISO Sensitivity Step Value  
Choose whether adjustments to sensitivity (ISO equivalen-  
cy) are made in increments equivalent to /EV (1/3 Step,  
the default option), /EV (1/2 Step), or 1EV (1 Step).  
Custom Setting b3: EV Steps for Exposure Control  
Choose whether adjustments to shutter speed, aperture,  
and bracketing are made in increments equivalent to /EV  
(1/3 Step, the default option), /EV (1/2 Step), or 1EV (1  
Step).  
Custom Setting b4: Steps for Exposure Comp and Fine Tuning  
Choose whether adjustments to exposure compensation  
and exposure fine tuning are made in increments equiv-  
alent to /EV (1/3 Step, the default option), /EV (1/2  
Step), or 1EV (1 Step).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
154  
Custom Setting b5: Easy Exposure Compensation  
This option controls whether the  
button is needed to  
set exposure compensation ( 72). If On is selected, the 0  
at the center of the exposure display will blink even when  
exposure compensation is set to 0.  
Option  
Off  
(default)  
Description  
Exposure compensation set by pressing  
command dial.  
button and rotating main  
Exposure compensation set by rotating command dial only. Dial used de-  
pends on option selected for Custom Setting f5> Change Main/Sub.  
Command dials (Custom Setting f5) > Change Main/Sub  
Off  
On  
On  
P
S
A
Sub-command dial  
Sub-command dial  
Main command dial  
Sub-command dial  
Main command dial  
Sub-command dial  
M
N/A  
On (Auto  
Reset)  
As for On except that exposure compensation set using command dial  
only is cancelled when camera is turned off or exposure meters turn off.  
Custom Setting b6: Center-Weighted Area  
When calculating exposure, center-weighted metering as-  
signs the greatest weight to a circle in the center of the  
frame. The diameter (φ) of this circle can be selected from  
6, 8, 10, and 13mm (the default option is 8mm; note that  
the diameter is fixed at 8mm when a non-CPU lens is used,  
regardless of the setting selected for Non-CPU Lens Data  
in the shooting menu).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
155  
Custom Setting b7: Fine Tune Optimal Exposure  
Use this option to fine-tune the exposure value selected  
by the camera. Exposure can be fine tuned separately for  
each metering method by from +1 to –1EV in steps of  
/ EV. Selecting this option displays a message warning  
that the icon does not appear when exposure is altered;  
highlight Yes and press the multi selector to the right (se-  
lect No to exit without altering exposure). Highlight a me-  
tering method and press the multi selector to the right to  
display a list of exposure values. Highlight an option, then  
press to the right to make a selection.  
Custom Setting c1: AE Lock Buttons  
This option determines what controls lock exposure.  
Option  
Description  
AE-L/AF-L Button Exposure can only be locked by pressing  
(default)  
AE-L/AF-L button.  
Exposure can be locked by pressing AE-L/AF-  
+Release Button L button or by pressing shutter-release but-  
ton halfway.  
Custom Setting c2: Assignment of AE-L/AF-L Button  
This option controls the behavior of the AE-L/AF-L button.  
Fine-Tuning Exposure  
Exposure can be fine-tuned separately for each Custom Settings bank. Note that as the  
exposure compensation icon ( ) is not displayed, the only way to determine whether ex-  
posure has been altered is to view the fine-tuning menu. Exposure compensation ( 72)  
is recommended in most situations.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
156  
Option  
AE/AF Lock  
(default)  
Description  
Both focus and exposure lock while AE-L/AF-L button is pressed.  
AE Lock Only Exposure locks while AE-L/AF-L button is pressed. Focus is unaffected.  
AE Lock Exposure locks when AE-L/AF-L button is pressed and remains locked until  
Hold/Reset button is pressed again, shutter is released or exposure meters turn off.  
Exposure locks when AE-L/AF-L button is pressed and remains locked until  
button is pressed again or exposure meters turn off.  
AE Lock Hold  
AF Lock  
Focus locks while AE-L/AF-L button is pressed. Exposure is unaffected.  
Custom Setting c3: Auto Meter-Off Delay  
This option controls how long the camera continues to  
meter exposure when no operations are performed: 4s,  
6s (the default option), 8s, or 16s or until the camera is  
turned off (No Limit). Choose a shorter meter-off delay  
for longer battery life.  
Custom Setting c4: Self-Timer Delay  
This option controls the length of the shutter-release delay  
in self-timer mode. Shutter-release can be delayed by ap-  
proximately 2s, 5s, 10s (the default option), or 20s.  
Custom Setting c5: Monitor-Off Delay  
This option controls how long the monitor remains on  
when no operations are performed: 10s, 20s (the default  
option), 1 minute, 5 minutes, or 10 minutes. Choose a  
shorter monitor-off delay for longer battery life.  
The EH-6 AC Adapter  
When the camera is powered by an optional EH-6 AC adapter, exposure meters will not  
turn off and the monitor will only power off after ten minutes, regardless of the options  
chosen for Custom Settings c3 (Auto Meter-Off) and c5 (Monitor-Off).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
157  
Custom Setting d1: Beep  
Controls the pitch of the beep that sounds when the self-  
timer is counting down or the camera focuses in single-  
servo AF with Focus (the default setting) selected for Cus-  
tom Setting a2 (AF-S Mode Priority). Choose from High  
(the default option), Low, and Off.  
A
icon appears in the control panel when High or Low  
is selected.  
Custom Setting d2: Viewfinder Grid Display  
Select On to display on-demand grid lines in the view-  
fi nder ( 6). The default option is Off.  
Custom Setting d3: Viewfinder Warning Display  
Select On (the default option) to display a warning in the  
viewfinder when the battery is low, no memory card is in-  
serted, or when shooting in black-and-white. No warning  
is displayed when Off is selected; before shooting, check  
indicators in the control panel.  
Custom Setting d4: CL-Mode Shooting Speed  
This option determines the rate at which photographs  
can be taken in CL (continuous low-speed) mode (during  
interval timer photography, this setting also determines  
the frame advance rate for single-frame and mirror-up  
modes). Shooting speed can be set to values between  
1 and 4 frames per second (fps); the default value is 3fps.  
The frame advance rate may drop at slow shutter speeds.  
Custom Setting d5: Exposure Delay Mode  
Select On to delay shutter release until about 0.4s after  
the shutter-release button is pressed, reducing camera  
shake in situations in which the least camera movement  
could result in blurred photographs (for example, micro-  
scope photography). The default option is Off.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
158  
Custom Setting d6: File Number Sequence  
When a photograph is taken, the camera names the file  
new by adding one to the last file number used. This op-  
tion controls whether file numbering continues from the  
last number used when a new folder is created, the mem-  
ory card is formatted, or a new memory card is inserted in  
the camera.  
Option  
Description  
Off File numbering reset to 0001 when new folder is created, memory card is for-  
(default) matted or new memory card is inserted in camera.  
When new folder is created, memory card is formatted, or new memory card  
inserted in camera, file numbering continues from last number used or from  
On largest number in current folder, whichever is higher. If photograph is taken  
when current folder contains photograph numbered 9999, new folder will be  
created automatically and file numbering will begin again from 0001.  
As for On, except that next photograph taken is assigned file number by add-  
Reset ing one to largest file number in current folder. If selected folder contains no  
photographs, file numbering reset to 0001.  
Custom Setting d7: LCD Illumination  
This option controls the control panel backlight (LCD il-  
luminator).  
Option  
Off  
(default)  
Description  
Control panel illuminates only while power switch is rotated to  
position.  
Backlight stays on while exposure meters are active (note that this increases  
drain on battery).  
On  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
159  
Custom Setting d8: MB-D200 Battery Type  
To ensure that the camera functions as expected when AA  
batteries are used in the optional MB-D200 battery pack,  
match the option selected in this menu to the type of bat-  
tery inserted in the battery pack. There is no need to ad-  
just this option when using EN-EL3e batteries.  
Option  
LR6 (AA-size Alkaline)  
(default)  
Description  
Select when using LR6 alkaline AA batteries.  
HR6 (AA-size Ni-MH) Select when using HR6 NiMH AA batteries.  
FR6 (AA-size Lithium) Select when using FR6 lithium AA batteries.  
ZR6 (AA-size Ni-Mn) Select when using ZR6 nickel-manganese AA batteries.  
Custom Setting e1: Flash Sync Speed Setting  
This option controls flash sync speed. Options range from  
/s (1/250 s, the default setting) and /s (1/60 s). To  
enable Auto FP High-Speed Sync when using Speedlights  
that support the Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS), se-  
lect 1/250 s (Auto FP) (flash sync speed will be set to /s  
if the built-in flash fires or the attached Speedlight is not  
CLS-compatible). When the camera shows a shutter speed of /s in exposure  
mode P or A, Auto FP High-Speed Sync will be activated if the actual shutter  
speed is faster than /s.  
Fixing Shutter Speed at the Flash Sync Speed Limit  
To fix shutter speed at the sync speed limit in shutter-priority auto or manual exposure  
modes, select the shutter speed after the slowest possible shutter speed (30s or  
An X will be displayed in the flash sync indicator in the control panel and viewfinder.  
).  
Using AA Batteries  
EN-EL3e batteries are recommended for best performance. The capacity of AA batteries  
drops sharply at temperatures below 20°C (68°F) and varies with make and storage condi-  
tions; in some cases, batteries may cease to function before their expiry date. Some AA  
batteries can not be used; due to their limited capacity and performance characteristics,  
alkaline and nickel-manganese batteries should be used only when no other alternative is  
available. The camera shows the level of AA batteries as follows:  
Control panel Viewfinder  
Description  
Batteries fully charged.  
Low battery. Ready fresh batteries.  
(blinks) Shutter-release disabled. Change batteries.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(blinks)  
160  
Custom Setting e2: Slowest Speed When Using Flash  
This option determines the slowest shutter speed pos-  
sible when using front- or rear-curtain sync or red-eye  
reduction in programmed auto or aperture-priority auto  
exposure mode (regardless of the setting chosen, shutter  
speeds can be as slow as 30s in shutter-priority auto and  
manual exposure modes or when the flash is set to slow  
sync, slow rear-curtain sync, or red-eye reduction with slow  
sync). Options range from /s (1/60 s, the default setting)  
to 30s (30 s).  
Custom Setting e3: Built-in Flash Mode  
Choose the flash mode for the built-in flash.  
TTL (default): Flash output is adjusted automatically in re-  
sponse to shooting conditions.  
Manual: The flash fires at the level selected in the menu  
shown at right. Highlight a setting between Full Power  
1
and 1/128 Power (  
/
128  
of full power) and press the multi  
selector right to return to the Custom Settings menu (at  
full power, built-in Speedlight has a Guide Number of  
13/42 [m/ft, ISO 100]).  
icons blink in the control panel  
and viewfinder. No monitor preflash is emitted, allowing  
the built-in flash to function as a master flash for optional  
slave flash units when used with a remote Speedlight  
commander such as the SU-4.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
161  
Repeating Flash: The flash fires repeatedly while the shutter  
is open, producing a strobe-light effect. icons blink  
in the control panel and viewfinder when this option is  
selected. Press the multi selector left or right to highlight  
the following options, up or down to change. Press the  
button to return to the Custom Settings menu when  
settings are complete.  
Option  
Description  
Output Highlight flash output (expressed as fraction of full power).  
Choose number of times flash fires at selected output. Note that depending  
Times on shutter speed and option selected for Interval, actual number of flashes  
may be less than selected.  
Interval Choose number of times flash fires per second.  
“Times”  
The number of times the flash can fire in succession is determined by flash output.  
Options available for “Times”  
2
2–5  
1/4  
1/8  
1/16  
1/32  
1/64  
1/128  
2–10  
2–10, 15  
2–10, 15, 20, 25  
2–10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
162  
Commander Mode: Choose this option to use the built-in  
fl ash as a master flash controlling one or more remote  
optional Speedlights in up to two groups (A and B) using  
Advanced Wireless Lighting.  
Option  
Description  
Built-in Choose flash mode for built-in flash (commander flash).  
i-TTL mode. Menu of flash compensation values will be displayed; choose  
TTL value between +3.0 and –3.0EV in steps of /EV. At settings other than 0,  
will be displayed in control panel and viewfinder.  
Choose flash output level for built-in flash from values between Full Power  
M
--  
and 1/128 Power (/ of full power).  
fi nder.  
Built-in flash does not fire, but AF-assist illuminator lights. Built-in flash must  
be raised to allow monitor preflashes to fire. is not displayed in control panel  
fl ash-sync mode display.  
fl ashes in control panel and view-  
Group A Choose flash mode for all flashes in group A.  
i-TTL mode. Menu of flash compensation values will be displayed; choose  
value between +3.0 and –3.0EV in steps of /EV.  
TTL  
Auto aperture (not available with SB-600 and SB-R200 Speedlights). Menu of  
AA fl ash compensation values will be displayed; choose value between +3.0 and  
–3.0EV in steps of /EV.  
Choose flash output level for flashes in Group A from values between Full  
Power and 1/128 Power (/ of full power).  
M
--  
Flashes in Group A do not fire.  
Group B Choose flash mode for all flashes in group B.  
i-TTL mode. Menu of flash compensation values will be displayed; choose  
value between +3.0 and –3.0EV in steps of /EV.  
TTL  
Auto aperture (not available with optional SB-600 and SB-R200 Speedlights).  
AA Menu of flash compensation values will be displayed; choose value between  
+3.0 and –3.0EV in steps of /EV.  
Choose flash output level for flashes in Group B from values between Full  
Power and 1/128 Power (/ of full power).  
M
--  
Flashes in Group B do not fire.  
Choose from channels 1–4. All Speedlights in both groups must be set to  
same channel.  
Channel  
Flash Exposure Compensation  
Flash exposure compensation ( 73) has no effect in Commander mode.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
163  
To use optional Speedlights in commander mode, select Commander Mode for  
Custom Setting e3 and follow the steps below.  
1
2
5
8
Highlight Built-in >Mode.  
Select desired flash mode.  
If TTL or M is selected, addi-  
tional options can be select-  
ed. Press multi selector up or  
down to display option, press  
right to select.  
3
4
Highlight Group A >Mode.  
Select desired flash mode.  
If TTL, AA, or M is selected,  
additional options can be se-  
lected. Press multi selector  
up or down to display option,  
press right to select. Repeat  
Steps 4–6 for Group B.  
6
7
Highlight Channel.  
Select channel.  
Press button.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
164  
Compose shot and arrange optional Speedlights as shown below.  
10  
11  
Speedlight  
5m/16´ or less  
60–30°  
wireless remote  
sensor should  
face camera.  
30° or less  
Camera  
(built-in  
flash)  
10m/33´ or less  
30° or less  
5m/16´ or less  
60–30°  
Maximum distance between optional Speedlights and camera is about 10m (33´)  
when Speedlight is positioned in front of camera (within 30° on either side of  
center line), or about 5m (16´) when Speedlight is 30–60° to either side of center  
line.  
Turn all Speedlights on and set all optional Speedlights to channel selected in  
Steps 7–8. See Speedlight manual for details.  
Commander Mode  
Position the sensor windows on the optional Speedlights where they will pick up the moni-  
tor preflashes from the built-in flash (take particular care when not using a tripod). Be sure  
that direct light or strong reflections from the optional Speedlights do not enter the camera  
lens (in TTL mode) or the photocell on the optional Speedlight (AA mode), as this may inter-  
fere with exposure. To prevent the timing flashes emitted by the built-in flash from appear-  
ing in photographs taken at short ranges, use a low ISO sensitivity and small aperture (large  
f/-number) or an optional SG-3IR infrared panel for the built-in flash. An SG-3IR is required  
for best results with rear-curtain sync, which produces brighter timing flashes. After posi-  
tioning the Speedlights, take a test shot and view the results in the camera monitor.  
Although there is no limit on the number of optional Speedlights that may used, the practical  
maximum is three. With more than this number, the light emitted by the other flash units will  
interfere with performance. All Speedlights must be in the same group; flash compensation (  
73) applies to all Speedlights. See the Speedlight manual for more information.  
If On is selected for Custom Setting e4 (Modeling Flash; 166), all flashes will emit a model-  
ing flash when the depth-of-field preview button is pressed. Commander mode can also be  
used with FV lock ( 81).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
165  
Press flash pop-button to raise built-in flash (note that  
built-it flash must be raised even if -- is selected for Built-  
in >Flash Mode).  
12  
13  
After confirming that camera flash-ready light and flash-ready lights for all Speed-  
lights are lit, frame photograph, focus, and shoot.  
Custom Setting e4: Preview Button Activates Modeling Flash  
At the default setting of On, the built-in flash and optional  
Speedlights that support the Nikon Creative Lighting Sys-  
tem will emit a modeling flash when the depth-of-field  
preview button is pressed. Select Off to disable this fea-  
ture.  
Custom Setting e5: Auto Bracketing Set  
This option controls what settings are affected when auto  
bracketing is in effect.  
Option  
AE & Flash  
(default)  
Description  
Camera performs exposure and flash-level bracketing.  
AE Only  
Camera performs exposure bracketing only.  
Flash Only Camera performs flash-level bracketing only.  
Camera performs white balance bracketing (not available at image  
WB Bracketing  
quality settings of NEF/RAW or NEF+JPEG).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
166  
Custom Setting e6: Auto Bracketing in M Exposure Mode  
This option controls what settings are affected when AE  
& Flash or AE Only is selected for Custom Setting e5 in  
manual exposure mode.  
Option  
Description  
Flash/Speed Camera varies shutter speed (Custom Setting e5 set to AE Only) or shut-  
(default)  
ter speed and flash level (Custom Setting e5 set to AE & Flash).  
Camera varies shutter speed and aperture (Custom Setting e5 set to AE  
Only) or shutter speed, aperture, and flash level (Custom Setting e5 set  
to AE & Flash).  
Flash/Speed/  
Aperture  
Flash/  
Camera varies aperture (Custom Setting e5 set to AE Only) or aperture  
Aperture and flash level (Custom Setting e5 set to AE & Flash).  
Flash Only Camera varies flash level only (Custom Setting e5 set to AE & Flash).  
• If no flash is attached when Custom Setting b1 (ISO Auto) is on, camera will vary ISO  
sensitivity only, regardless of setting selected.  
• Flash bracketing performed only with i-TTL or AA flash control.  
Custom Setting e7: Auto Bracketing Order  
This option controls the order in which bracketing is per-  
formed.  
Option  
Description  
MTR>Under>Over Bracketing performed in order described  
(default)  
inBracketing( 73).  
Bracketing proceeds in order from lowest  
to highest value.  
Under>MTR>Over  
Custom Setting e8: Auto Bracketing Selection Method  
This option controls how the bracketing program is se-  
lected.  
Option  
Description  
Manual Pressing  
button, rotate main command dial  
Value Select to select number of shots, sub-command dial to  
(default) select bracketing increment.  
Press button and rotate main command dial  
Preset Value to turn bracketing on and off. Press  
Select and rotate sub-command dial to select number  
of shots and bracketing increment.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
button  
167  
Custom Setting f1: Multi-Selector Center Button  
This option determines what operations can be performed  
by pressing the center of the multi selector.  
Shooting Mode: This option controls what operation can be  
performed by pressing the center of the multi selector  
when the camera is in shooting mode.  
Option  
Description  
Pressing center of multi selector selects center focus area or center focus-  
area group (group dynamic-AF). If Pattern 2 is selected for Custom Setting  
a4 (Group Dynamic AF), center of multi selector can be used to toggle be-  
tween center focus area groups.  
Center AF  
Area  
(default)  
Illuminate Pressing center of multi selector illuminates active focus area or focus-area  
AF Area group (group dynamic-AF) in viewfinder.*  
Pressing center of multi selector has no effect when camera is in shooting  
Not Used  
mode.*  
* Center of multi selector can not be used to toggle between center focus-area groups  
when Pattern 2 is selected for Custom Setting a4 (Group Dynamic AF).  
Playback Mode: This option controls what operation is per-  
formed when the center of the multi selector is pressed in  
playback mode.  
Option  
Thumbnail On/Off Press center of multi selector to toggle between single-image and  
(default) thumbnail playback.  
Description  
Histogram On/Off Press center of multi selector to turn histogram display on and off.  
Press center of multi selector to zoom in on image, press again to  
return to full-frame display or thumbnail playback. When this op-  
Zoom On/Off tion is selected, menu of zoom settings is displayed. Choose from  
Low Magnification, Medium Magnification, and High Magni-  
fication.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
168  
Custom Setting f2: When Multi-Selector Is Pressed;  
If desired, the multi selector can be used to activate the  
exposure meters or initiate autofocus.  
Option  
Do Nothing  
(default)  
Description  
Multi selector does not activate exposure meters or initiate auto-  
focus.  
Reset Mtr-Off Delay Pressing multi selector activates exposure meters.  
In AF-S or AF-C mode, pressing multi selector activates exposure  
meters. Camera focuses while multi selector is pressed.  
Initiate Autofocus  
Custom Setting f3: Role of Multi-Selector in full-frame Playback  
By default, pressing the multi selector up or down during  
playback displays the other images on the memory card,  
while pressing the multi selector left or right changes the  
photo information displayed. These roles can be reversed  
using Custom Setting f3.  
Option  
Info▲▼/PB  
(default)  
Description  
Press multi selector up or down to change photo info displayed,  
left or right to display additional images.  
Press multi selector up or down to display additional images, left or  
right to change photo info displayed.  
Info  
/PB▲▼  
Using the Multi Selector  
The multi selector can be used at any time when the monitor is on. The focus selector  
lock switch only takes effect when the monitor is off.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
169  
Custom Setting f4: Assign FUNC. Button  
This option controls the function performed by the FUNC.  
button.  
Option  
Description  
FV Lock If built-in flash or optional CLS-compatible Speedlight is used, flash value  
(default) locks when FUNC. button is pressed. Press again to cancel FV lock.  
As above, except that if built-in flash is lowered or optional CLS-compatible  
Speedlight is not attached, FUNC. button and command dials can be used  
to specify focal length and aperture of non-CPU lenses ( 93).  
FV Lock/  
Lens Data  
If FUNC. button is pressed when rotating command dials, changes to shut-  
ter speed (exposure modes S and M) and aperture (exposure modes A and  
M) are made in increments of 1EV.  
1 Step Spd/  
Aperture  
Same as  
AE-L/AF-L  
FUNC. button performs same functions as AE-L/AF-L button.  
Flash Off Flash will not fire in photos taken while FUNC. button is pressed.  
While FUNC. button is pressed, all shots in exposure or flash bracketing  
program will be taken each time shutter-release button is pressed. In con-  
tinuous high-speed and continuous low-speed modes, camera will repeat  
bracketing burst while shutter-release button is held down. If white-bal-  
ance bracketing is selected, camera will take photos at up to 5fps (single  
Bracketing  
Burst  
or continuous high-speed mode) or 1–4fps (continuous low-speed mode)  
and perform white balance bracketing on each frame.  
Matrix  
Metering  
Matrix metering activated while FUNC. button is pressed.  
Center-  
Weighted  
Center-weighted metering activated while FUNC. button is pressed.  
Spot  
Metering  
Spot metering activated while FUNC. button is pressed.  
Focus Area Press FUNC. button and rotate command dials to cycle between normal  
Frame and wide focus areas ( 56).  
Custom Setting f5: Customize Command Dials  
This option controls the operation of the main and sub-  
command dials.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
170  
Option  
Description  
Controls operation of command dials on camera and  
optional MB-D200 battery pack when setting flexible  
program, shutter speed, aperture, easy exposure com-  
pensation, exposure mode, exposure compensation  
value, bracketing increment, and flash sync mode.  
Normal (default): Normal command dial operation.  
Reverse: Reverses rotation of command dials.  
Exchanges functions of main and sub-command dials  
when setting shutter speed and aperture.  
Off (default): Main command dial controls shutter  
speed, sub-command dial controls aperture.  
On: Main command dial controls aperture, sub-com-  
mand dial controls shutter speed.  
Rotate  
Direction  
Change  
Main/  
Sub  
Controls whether changes to aperture are made using  
lens aperture ring or command dials. Regardless of  
setting chosen, lens ring must be used to set aperture  
for non-CPU lenses, command dials to set aperture for  
type G lenses not equipped with aperture ring.  
Sub-command Dial (default): Aperture can only be  
adjusted with sub-command dial (or main command dial if Change Main/  
Sub is On).  
Aperture  
Setting  
Aperture Ring: Aperture can only be adjusted using lens aperture ring.  
Camera aperture display shows aperture in increments of 1EV. This option  
is selected automatically when non-CPU lens is attached.  
Controls functions performed by command dials dur-  
ing playback or when menus are displayed.  
Off (default): Multi selector used to choose pic-  
ture displayed, highlight thumbnails, and navigate  
menus.  
On: Main command dial performs same function as  
pressing multi selector left or right. Sub-command dial performs same  
function as pressing multi selector up or down. Note that this option has no  
effect on the roles played by the command dials during playback zoom.  
Single-image playback: main command dial is used to choose picture dis-  
played, sub-command dial to display additional photo information.  
Menus  
and  
Playback  
Thumbnail playback: main command dial moves cursor left or right, sub-  
command dial moves cursor up or down.  
Menu navigation: main command dial moves highlight bar up or down.  
Rotate sub-command dial to right to display sub-menu, to left to return  
to previous menu. To make selection, press multi selector to right, press  
center of multi selector, or press button.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
171  
Custom Setting f6: Setting Method for Buttons and Dials  
This option allows adjustments that are normally made by  
pressing the  
,
,
,
, ISO, QUAL, or WB button and  
rotating a command dial to be made by rotating the com-  
mand dial after the button is released.  
Option  
Description  
Default Changes to settings made by rotating command dial while button is held  
(default) down.  
Settings can be changed by rotating command dial after button is released. To  
exit, press button again, press shutter-release button halfway, or (except when  
No Limit is selected for Custom Setting c3 or optional AC adapter is used) wait  
Hold  
for about 20s.  
Custom Setting f7: Disable Shutter If No Memory Card  
This option can be used to enable the shutter release  
when no memory card is inserted in the camera. Note  
that when photographs are being captured to a computer  
using Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control, photographs are  
not recorded to the camera memory card and the shutter  
release will be enabled regardless of the setting chosen  
for this option.  
Option  
Release Locked  
(default)  
Description  
Shutter-release button disabled when no memory card is inserted.  
Shutter-release button enabled when no memory card is inserted.  
Enable Release Photographs taken when no memory card is inserted are not saved,  
although they will be displayed in monitor.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
172  
Technical Notes  
Optional Accessories  
One advantage of digital SLR cameras is the wide variety of accessories available  
for broadening the scope of digital photography. The following types of acces-  
sory are available for the D200:  
Flash units (Speedlights)  
Battery  
packs  
Viewfinder accessories  
Batteries  
K
AC  
Y P  
TTER  
A
Li-ion  
B
Lenses  
10-pin remote  
terminal accessories  
AC adapters  
Use Only Nikon Brand Accessories  
Only Nikon brand accessories certified by Nikon specifically for use with your Nikon digital  
camera are engineered and proven to operate within its operational and safety require-  
ments. THE USE OF NON-NIKON ACCESSORIES COULD DAMAGE YOUR CAMERA AND MAY VOID YOUR NIKON WAR-  
RANTY.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
173  
Lenses  
CPU lenses (particularly type G and D lenses) are recommended for use with the  
D200 (note that IX Nikkor CPU lenses can not be used).  
The following lenses can be used with the D200:  
Focus  
M (with  
AF electronic  
range finder)  
Mode  
Metering  
Camera setting  
P
A
M
S
M
3D Color  
Lens/accessory  
Type G or D AF Nikkor2; AF-S, AF-I Nikkor  
3
PC-Micro Nikkor 85 mm f/2.8D4  
AF-S/AF-I Teleconverter7  
Other AF Nikkor (except lenses for F3AF)  
AI-P Nikkor  
AI-modified, AI-, AI-S, or Series E Nikkor12  
Medical Nikkor 120 mm f/4  
Reflex Nikkor  
5
6
3
8
8
3
9
9
3
10  
3
10  
13  
14  
15  
16  
13  
17  
13  
13  
20  
15  
5
PC-Nikkor  
AI-type Teleconverter 18  
8
14  
15  
8
14  
15  
TC-16A AF Teleconverter  
PB-6 Bellows Focusing Attachment19  
Auto extension rings (PK-series 11-A, 12, or 13;  
PN-11)  
8
8
13  
1
2
3
4
IX Nikkor lenses can not be used.  
Vibration Reduction (VR) supported with VR lenses.  
Spot metering meters selected focus area.  
11 Some lenses can not be used (see following page).  
12 Range of rotation for Ai 80–200 mm f/2.8S ED tripod mount  
limited by camera body. Filters can not be exchanged while Ai  
200–400 mm f/4S ED is mounted on camera.  
The camera’s exposure metering and flash control systems do  
not work properly when shifting and/or tilting the lens, or 13 If maximum aperture is specified using Non-CPU Lens Data  
when an aperture other than the maximum aperture is used.  
Electronic range finder can not be used with shifting or tilting.  
Manual exposure mode only.  
Compatible with AF-I Nikkor lenses and with all AF-S lenses  
except AF-S DX VR ED 18–200 mm f/3.5–5.6G; AF-S DX ED  
12–24 mm f/4G, 17–55 mm f/2.8G, 18–55 mm f/3.5–5.6G,  
option in shooting menu, aperture value will be displayed in  
viewfinder and control panel.  
14 Can be used only if lens focal length and maximum aperture  
are specified using Non-CPU Lens Data option in shooting  
menu. Use spot or center-weighted metering if desired results  
are not achieved.  
5
6
7
18–70 mm f/3.5–4.5G, and 55–200 mm f/4–5.6G; AF-S VR 15 For improved precision, specify lens focal length and maxi-  
ED 24–120 mm f/3.5–5.6G; and AF-S ED 17–35 mm f/2.8D,  
24–85 mm f/3.5–4.5G, and 28–70 mm f/2.8D.  
mum aperture using Non-CPU Lens Data option in shooting  
menu.  
8
9
With maximum effective aperture of f/5.6 or faster.  
16 Can be used at in manual exposure modes at shutter speeds  
slower than 1/125 s. If maximum aperture is specified using  
Non-CPU Lens Data option in shooting menu, aperture value  
will be displayed in viewfinder and control panel.  
If AF 80–200 mm f/2.8S, AF 35–70 mm f/2.8S, new-model AF  
28–85 mm f/3.5–4.5S, or AF 28–85 mm f/3.5–4.5S is zoomed  
in while focusing at minimum range, image on matte screen in  
viewfinder may not be in focus when in-focus indicator is dis- 17 Exposure determined by presetting lens aperture. In aper-  
played. Focus manually using image in viewfinder as guide.  
10 With maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster.  
ture-priority auto exposure mode, preset aperture using lens  
aperture ring before performing AE lock or shifting lens. In  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
174  
manual exposure mode, preset aperture using lens aperture 19 Requires PK-12 or PK-13 auto extension ring.  
ring and determine exposure before shifting lens.  
18 Exposure compensation required when used with AI 28–  
85 mm f/3.5–4.5S, AI 35–105 mm f/3.5–4.5S, AI 35–135 mm  
f/3.5–4.5S, or AF-S 80–200 mm f/2.8D. See teleconverter  
manual for details.  
20 Use preset aperture. In exposure mode A, set aperture using  
focusing attachment before determining exposure and taking  
photograph.  
PF-4 Reprocopy Outfit requires PA-4 Camera Holder.  
Incompatible Accessories and Non-CPU Lenses  
The following accessories and non-CPU lenses can NOT be used with the D200:  
• Non-AI lenses  
• Lenses for the F3AF (80mm f/2.8, 200mm  
• Lenses that require the AU-1 focusing unit f/3.5, TC-16 Teleconverter)  
(400mm f/4.5, 600mm f/5.6, 800mm f/8, • PC 28mm f/4 (serial number 180900 or  
1200mm f/11)  
• Fisheye (6mm f/5.6, 8mm f/8, OP 10mm • PC 35mm f/2.8 (serial numbers 851001–  
earlier)  
f/5.6)  
906200)  
• 21mm f/4 (old type)  
• K2 rings  
• PC 35mm f/3.5 (old type)  
• 1000mm f/6.3 Reflex (old type)  
• ED 180–600mm f/8 (serial numbers • 1000mm f/11 Reflex (serial numbers  
174041–174180) 142361–143000)  
• ED 360–1200mm f/11 (serial numbers • 2000mm f/11 Reflex (serial numbers  
174031–174127)  
200111–200310)  
• 200–600mm f/9.5 (serial numbers 280001–  
300490)  
Compatible Non-CPU Lenses  
If lens data are specified using the Non-CPU lens data option in the shooting menu, many  
of the features available with CPU lenses can also be used with non-CPU lenses. If lens data  
are not specified, color matrix metering can not be used, and center-weighted metering is  
used when matrix metering is selected.  
Non-CPU lenses can only be used in exposure modes A and M, when aperture must be set  
using the lens aperture ring. If the maximum aperture has not been specified using Non-  
CPU lens data, the camera aperture display will show the number of stops from maximum  
aperture; the actual aperture value must be read off the lens aperture ring. Aperture-prior-  
ity auto will be selected automatically in exposure modes P and S. The exposure-mode  
indicator in the control panel will blink, and A will be displayed in the viewfinder.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
175  
CPU lenses can be identified by the presence of CPU contacts. Type G lenses are  
marked with a “Gon the lens barrel, type D lenses with a “D.”  
CPU lens  
Type G lens  
Type D lens  
Type G lenses are not equipped with a lens aperture ring. Unlike other CPU lens-  
es, there is no need to lock the aperture ring at the minimum aperture setting  
(maximum f/-number) when using a type G lens.  
Picture Angle and Focal Length  
The diagonal picture angle of the D200 is less than that of a 35-mm camera.  
When calculating the focal length of the lenses for the D200 in 35-mm format,  
multiply the focal length of the lens by about 1.5:  
Option  
35-mm camera  
D200  
35-mm camera  
D200  
Approximate focal length (mm) in 35-mm format (modified for picture angle)  
17  
25.5  
105  
20  
30  
135  
202.5  
24  
36  
180  
270  
28  
42  
200  
300  
35  
50  
75  
400  
600  
60  
90  
500  
750  
85  
127.5  
600  
52.5  
300  
450  
157.5  
900  
Calculating Picture Angle  
Picture size (35-mm format)  
(36 mm × 24 mm)  
The size of the area exposed by a 35-mm  
camera is 36×24mm. The size of the  
area exposed by the D200, in contrast,  
is 23.6×15.8mm, meaning that the diago-  
nal picture angle of a 35-mm camera is ap-  
proximately 1.5 times that of the D200.  
Picture diagonal  
Lens  
Picture size (D200)  
(23.6 mm × 15.8 mm)  
Picture angle (35-mm format)  
Picture angle (D200)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
176  
Optional Flash Units (Speedlights)  
When used with a compatible device such as the SB-800, SB-600, and remote  
SB-R200 Speedlights (available separately), the D200 supports the full range of  
options available with the Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS), including i-TTL  
fl ash control ( 76), FV Lock ( 81), and Auto FP High-Speed Sync ( 160).  
Support for Advanced Wireless Lighting allows the built-in flash to be used as a  
commander unit for remote SB-800, SB-600, and SB-R200 Speedlights. See the  
Speedlight manual for details. Note that the built-in Speedlight will not fire when  
an optional Speedlight is attached.  
SB-800 and SB-600 Speedlights  
These high performance Speedlights have Guide Numbers of 38/125 and 30/98  
respectively (m/ft, 35-mm zoom head position, ISO 100, 20°C/68°F). The flash  
head can be rotated through 90° above the horizontal, 180° left, and 90° right  
for bounce-flash or close-up photography. The SB-800 can be rotated 7° below  
the horizontal. Auto power zoom (24–105mm and 24–85mm, respectively) en-  
sures that the illuminating angle is adjusted in accord with lens focal length. The  
built-in wide panel can be used for an angle of 14mm (the SB-800 also supports  
17mm). An illuminator is included to assist in adjusting settings in the dark.  
SB-R200 Wireless Remote Speedlight  
This high-performance wireless remote Speedlight has a Guide Number of 10/32  
(m/ft, ISO 100, 20°C/68°F). Although it cannot be mounted on the camera ac-  
cessory shoe, the SB-R200 can be fired using an optional SB-800 Speedlight or  
SU-800 wireless Speedlight commander, or a camera with Advanced Wireless  
Lighting and a built-in flash. With the D200 in commander mode ( 163), the  
SB-R200 serves as a remote flash. It can held by hand, placed on an AS-20 Speed-  
light stand, or mounted on the camera lens using the SX-1 attachment for re-  
mote control and close-up i-TTL photography.  
Use Only Nikon Flash Accessories  
Use only Nikon Speedlights. Negative voltages or voltages over 250V applied to the ac-  
cessory shoe could not only prevent normal operation, but damage the sync circuitry of  
the camera or flash. Before using a Nikon Speedlight not listed in this section, contact a  
Nikon-authorized service representative for more information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
177  
The following features are available with the SB-800, SB-600, and SB-R200:  
Speedlight  
Advanced Wireless Lighting  
SB-800  
SB-6001 SB-R2002  
Flash mode/feature  
i-TTL3  
Auto aperture5  
SB-800  
SB-600  
4
4
6
AA  
A
GN  
M
RPT  
REAR  
6
7
Non-TTL auto  
Range-priority manual  
Manual  
Repeating flash  
Rear-curtain sync  
Red-eye reduction  
9
9
Flash Color Information Communication  
Auto FP High-Speed Sync8  
FV lock  
9
9
9
AF-assist for multi-area AF10  
Auto zoom  
ISO Auto (Custom Setting b1)  
5
5
1
2
Functions as remote flash only.  
5
Not available with non-CPU lenses unless lens data have been  
specified using Non-CPU Lens Data.  
Use Speedlight controls to select flash mode.  
Available only if non-CPU lens is used without specifying lens  
data in Non-CPU Lens Data menu.  
Select 1/250 s (Auto FP) for Custom Setting e1 (Flash Sync  
Speed; 160). Not available if built-in flash fires.  
Available only when SB-800 is used as master flash or optional  
SU-800 wireless Speedlight commander is used.  
Can not be mounted on camera accessory shoe. Can be used  
as remote flash if camera is in commander mode ( 163) or  
SB-800 Speedlight is mounted on camera and SB-R200 is con-  
trolled by optional SU-800 wireless Speedlight commander.  
When using non-CPU lens with i-TTL Balanced Fill-Flash for  
Digital SLR, improved precision can be obtained if lens data  
are specified in Non-CPU Lens Data menu.  
6
7
3
4
8
9
Standard i-TTL for Digital SLR is used with spot metering or  
when selected with Speedlight.  
10 Available with AF CPU lenses only.  
The following Speedlights can be used in non-TTL auto and manual modes. If  
they are set to TTL, the camera shutter-release button will lock and no photo-  
graphs can be taken.  
Speedlight SB-80DX, SB-28DX,  
SB-28, SB-26,  
SB-50DX, SB-23,  
SB-292, SB-21B2,  
SB-29S2  
SB-30, SB-271, SB-22S,  
SB-22, SB-20, SB-16B,  
SB-15  
Flash mode  
SB-25, SB-24  
A
M
Non-TTL auto  
Manual  
Repeating flash  
REAR Rear-curtain sync  
1 When an SB-27 is mounted on the D200, the flash mode is automatically set to TTL, and the shutter-release will be disabled. Set the  
SB-27 to A (non-TTL auto flash).  
2 Autofocus is only available with AF-Micro lenses (60 mm, 105 mm, or 200 mm).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
178  
Notes on Optional Speedlights  
Refer to the Speedlight manual for detailed instructions. If the Speedlight supports the  
Creative Lighting System, refer to the section on CLS-compatible digital SLR cameras. The  
D200 is not included in the “digital SLR” category in the SB-80DX, SB-28DX, and SB-50DX  
manuals.  
If Auto FP High-Speed Sync is not used, the shutter will synchronize with an external flash  
at speeds of /s or slower.  
i-TTL flash control can be used at ISO sensitivities between 100 and 1600. At values over  
1600, the desired results may not be achieved at some ranges or aperture settings. If the  
fl ash-ready indicator blinks for about three seconds after a photograph is taken, the flash  
has fired at full power and the photograph may be underexposed.  
When an SB-800 or SB-600 is attached, AF-assist illumination and red-eye reduction are  
performed by the optional Speedlight. The camera provides AF-assist illumination when  
other Speedlights are used ( 58–59).  
Auto power zoom is available only with SB-800 and SB-600 Speedlights.  
In programmed auto, the maximum aperture (minimum f/-number) is limited according to  
sensitivity (ISO equivalency), as shown below:  
Maximum aperture at ISO equivalent of:  
100  
4
125  
4.2  
160  
4.5  
200  
4.8  
250  
5
320  
5.3  
400  
5.6  
500  
6
640  
6.3  
800  
6.7  
1000 1250 1600  
7.1 7.6  
8
For each one-step increase in sensitivity (e.g., from 200 to 400), aperture is stopped down  
by half an f/-stop. If the maximum aperture of the lens is smaller than given above, the  
maximum value for aperture will be the maximum aperture of the lens.  
When an SC-series 17, 28, or 29 sync cable is used for off-camera flash photography, cor-  
rect exposure may not be achieved in i-TTL mode. We recommend that you choose spot  
metering to select standard i-TTL flash control. Take a test shot and view the results in the  
monitor.  
In i-TTL, use the flash panel or bounce adapter provided with your Speedlight. Do not use  
other panels such as diffusion panels, as this may produce incorrect exposure.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
179  
The Accessory Shoe  
The D200 is equipped with an accessory shoe that allows  
SB-series Speedlights, including the SB-800, 600, 80DX,  
50DX, 28DX, 28, 27, 23, 22S, and 29S to be mounted di-  
rectly on the camera without a sync cable. The accessory  
shoe is equipped with a safety lock for Speedlights with a  
locking pin, such as the SB-800 and SB-600.  
The Sync Terminal  
A sync cable can be connected to the sync terminal as  
required. Do not connect another Speedlight via a sync  
cable when performing rear-curtain sync flash photogra-  
phy with an SB-series Speedlights such as the 800, 600,  
80DX, 28DX, 28, 50DX, 27, 23, 22s, or 29s mounted on the  
camera accessory shoe.  
ISO Sensitivity (SB-800/SB-600)  
When used with optional SB-800 and SB-600 Speedlights, i-TTL flash control can adjust for  
ISO sensitivities between 100 and 1600. It may not be able to adjust flash level appropri-  
ately for values over 1600. When On is selected for Custom Setting b1 (ISO Auto; 152),  
ISO sensitivity will automatically be adjusted as required for optimal flash output. This may  
result in foreground subjects being underexposed in flash photographs taken at slow shut-  
ter speeds, in daylight, or against a bright background. In these cases, choose a flash mode  
other than slow sync or select mode A or M and choose a larger aperture.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
180  
Other Accessories  
At the time of writing, the following accessories were available for the D200.  
Contact your retailer or local Nikon representative for details.  
Power  
sources  
EN-EL3e Rechargeable Li-ion Battery: Additional EN-EL3e batteries are available  
from local retailers and Nikon service representatives. EN-EL3a and EN-EL3  
batteries can not be used.  
MB-D200 Battery Pack: The MB-D200 takes one or  
two rechargeable Nikon EN-EL3e Li-ion batter-  
ies or six AA alkaline, NiMH, lithium, or nickel-  
manganese batteries. It is equipped with a  
shutter-release button and main- and sub-com-  
mand dials for improved operation when taking  
photographs in portrait (tall) orientation. When  
attaching the MB-D200, remove the camera bat-  
tery cover as shown at right.  
60°  
EH-6 AC Adapter: Use the EH-6 to power the camera for extended periods.  
Diopter-Adjustment Viewfinder Lenses: Lenses are available with diopters of –5,  
–4, –3, –2, 0, +0.5, +1, +2, and +3m–1. Use diopter adjustment lenses only if  
the desired focus can not be achieved with the built-in diopter adjustment  
control (–2.0 to +1.0m–1). Test diopter adjustment lenses before purchase to  
ensure that the desired focus can be achieved.  
Viewfi nder  
eyepiece  
accessories  
DK-21M Magnifying Eyepiece: Increases viewfinder magnification to approxi-  
mately 1.10× (50-mm f/1.4 lens at infinity; –1.0m–1).  
DG-2 Magnifier: Magnify the scene displayed in the center of the viewfinder for  
close-up photography, copying, telephoto lenses, and other tasks that call for  
added precision. Eyepiece adapter required (available separately).  
Eyepiece Adapter: Use to attach the DG-2 Magnifier to the D200.  
DR-6 Right-Angle Viewing Attachment: The DR-6 attaches at a right angle to the  
viewfinder eyepiece, allowing the image in the viewfinder to be viewed from  
above when the camera is in the horizontal shooting position.  
Filters  
Nikon filters can be divided into three types: screw-in, drop-in, and rear-inter-  
change. Use Nikon filters; other filters may interfere with autofocus or electronic  
range finding.  
• The D200 can not be used with linear polarizing filters. Use the C-PL circular  
polarizing filter instead.  
• The NC and L37C filters are recommended for protecting the lens.  
When using an R60 filter, set exposure compensation to +1.  
• To prevent moiré, use of a filter is not recommended when the subject is  
framed against a bright light, or when a bright light source is in the frame.  
• Center-weighted metering is recommended with filters with exposure factors  
(filter factors) over 1× (Y48, O56, R60, X0, X1, C-PL, ND4S, ND8S, A2, A12, B2,  
B8, B12).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
181  
Remote The D200 is equipped with a ten-pin remote  
terminal terminal for remote control and automatic pho-  
accessories tography. The terminal is provided with a cap,  
which protects the contacts when the terminal  
is not in use. The following accessories can be  
used (cable lengths are given in parentheses; all figures are approximate):  
MC-22 Remote Cord (1m/3ft. 3in.): Remote shutter release with blue, yellow,  
and black terminals for connection to a remote shutter-triggering device, al-  
lowing control via sound or electronic signals.  
MC-30 Remote Cord (80cm/2ft. 7in.): Remote shutter release; can be used to  
reduce camera shake or keep the shutter open during a time exposure.  
MC-36 Remote Cord (85cm/2ft. 9in.): Remote shutter release; can be used to  
reduce camera shake or keep the shutter open during a time exposure.  
Equipped with back-lit control panel, shutter-release lock for use in bulb  
photography, and timer that beeps at one-second intervals.  
MC-21 Extension Cord (3m/9ft. 10in.): Can be connected to MC-series 20, 22, 23,  
25, 30, or 36.  
MC-23 Connecting Cord (40cm/1ft. 4in.): Connects two cameras for simulta-  
neous operation.  
MC-25 Adapter Cord (20cm/8in.): Ten-pin to two-pin adapter cord for connec-  
tion to devices with two-pin terminals, including the MW-2 radio control set,  
MT-2 intervalometer, and ML-2 modulite control set.  
MC-35 GPS Adapter Cord (35cm/1ft. 2in.): Connects camera to compatible GPS  
devices via PC cable supplied by manufacturer of GPS device, allowing lati-  
tude, longitude, altitude, and UTC (Coordinated Universal Time) to be record-  
ed with photographs ( 96).  
ML-3 Modulite Control Set: Allows infrared remote control at ranges of up to 8m  
(26ft.).  
Body caps  
BF-1A Body Cap: The BF-1A keeps the mirror, viewfinder screen, and low-pass  
fi lter free of dust when a lens is not in place.  
PC card  
adapters  
Software  
EC-AD1 PC Card Adapter: The EC-AD1 PC card adapter allows Type I Compact-  
Flash memory cards to be inserted in PCMCIA card slots.  
Nikon Capture 4 (Version 4.4 or Later): Nikon Capture 4 Version 4.4 or later can be  
used to control the camera, capture photos to a computer, and edit and save  
RAW images in other formats.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
182  
Approved Memory Cards  
The following cards have been tested and approved for use in the D200:  
SDCFB  
SDCFB (Type II)  
128MB, 256MB, 512MB, 1GB, 2GB, 4GB  
300MB  
SanDisk  
SDCF2B (Type II)  
256MB  
SDCFH (Ultra II)  
SDCFX (Extreme III)  
256MB, 512MB, 1GB, 2GB, 4GB, 8GB  
1GB, 2GB, 4GB  
Entry-level CompactFlash cards  
High speed 40× with Write Acceleration (WA)  
Professional 40× with WA  
Professional 80× with WA  
Professional 80× with WA and LockTight technology  
Microdrive  
128MB, 256MB, 512MB  
256MB, 512MB, 1GB  
8GB  
512MB, 1GB, 2GB, 4GB  
512MB, 2GB  
Lexar  
Media  
1GB, 2GB, 4GB, 6GB  
Operation is not guaranteed with other makes of card. For more details on the  
above cards, please contact the manufacturer.  
Memory Cards  
• Format memory cards in the camera before first use.  
• Turn the power off before inserting or removing memory cards. Do not remove memory  
cards from the camera, turn the camera off, or remove or disconnect the power source  
during formatting or while data are being recorded, deleted, or copied to a computer.  
Failure to observe these precautions could result in loss of data or in damage to the cam-  
era or card.  
• Do not touch the card terminals with your fingers or metal objects.  
• Do not apply force to the card casing. Failure to observe this precaution could damage  
the card.  
• Do not bend, drop, or subject to strong physical shocks.  
• Do not expose to heat, water, high levels of humidity, or direct sunlight.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
183  
Caring for the Camera  
Storage  
When the camera will not be used for an extended period, replace the mon-  
itor cover, remove the battery, and store the battery in a cool, dry area with the  
terminal cover in place. To prevent mold or mildew, store the camera in a dry,  
well-ventilated area. Do not store your camera with naphtha or camphor moth  
balls or in locations that:  
• are poorly ventilated or subject to humidities of over 60%  
• are next to equipment that produces strong electromagnetic fields, such as  
televisions or radios  
• are exposed to temperatures above 50°C/122°F (for example, near a space  
heater or in a closed vehicle on a hot day) or below –10°C (14°F)  
Cleaning  
Use a blower to remove dust and lint, then wipe gently with a soft, dry  
cloth. After using the camera at the beach or seaside, wipe off sand or salt  
with a cloth lightly dampened in distilled water and dry thoroughly.  
IMPORTANT: Dust or other foreign matter inside the camera may cause  
damage not covered under warranty.  
Camera body  
These elements are made of glass and are easily damaged. Remove dust  
and lint with a blower. If using an aerosol blower, keep the can vertical to  
prevent the discharge of liquid. To remove fingerprints and other stains,  
apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft cloth and clean with care.  
Remove dust and lint with a blower. When removing fingerprints and oth-  
Lens,  
mirror, and  
viewfinder  
Monitor er stains, wipe the surface lightly with a soft cloth or chamois leather. Do  
not apply pressure, as this could result in damage or malfunction.  
The Monitor  
Should the monitor break, care should be taken to avoid injury caused by broken glass and  
to prevent liquid crystal from entering your eyes and mouth.  
The Control Panel  
Rarely, static electricity may cause the control panel to brighten or darken. This does not  
indicate a malfunction; the display will shortly return to normal.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
184  
The Low-Pass Filter  
The image sensor that acts as the camera’s picture element is fitted with a low-  
pass filter to prevent moiré. Although this filter prevents foreign objects from  
adhering directly to the image sensor, under certain conditions dirt or dust on  
the filter may appear in photographs. If you suspect that dirt or dust inside  
the camera is affecting your photographs, you can clean the filter as described  
below. Note, however, that the low-pass filter is extremely delicate and easily  
damaged. Nikon recommends that filter be cleaned only by Nikon-authorized  
service personnel.  
Remove the lens and turn the camera on.  
1
2
Display the Mirror Lock-up menu and press  
the multi selector right ( 117; note that this  
option is not available at battery levels of  
or below, while shooting multiple exposures, or  
when using an optional MB-D200 battery pack  
with AA batteries). The message shown at right  
will be displayed and a row of dashes will appear  
in the control panel and viewfinder. To return  
to normal operation without raising the mirror,  
turn the camera off.  
Press the shutter-release button all the way  
down. The mirror will be raised and the shutter  
curtain will open, revealing the low-pass filter,  
and a row of dashes will blink in the control pan-  
el. The display in the viewfinder will turn off.  
3
Use a Reliable Power Source  
The camera shutter curtain is delicate and easily damaged. If the camera powers off while  
the mirror is raised, the shutter curtain will close automatically. Observe the following pre-  
cautions to prevent damage to the curtain:  
• Use a fully-charged battery or an EH-6 AC adapter (available separately) for prolonged  
inspection or cleaning of the low-pass filter.  
• Do not turn the camera off or remove or disconnect the power source while the mirror is  
raised.  
• If the battery runs low while the mirror is raised, a beep will sound and the AF-assist il-  
luminator will blink to warn that the shutter curtain will close and the mirror will lower in  
about two minutes. End cleaning or inspection immediately.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
185  
Holding the camera so that light falls on the low-  
pass filter, examine the filter for dust or lint. If no  
foreign objects are present, proceed to Step 6.  
4
5
Remove any dust and lint from the filter with a  
blower. Do not use a blower-brush, as the bris-  
tles could damage the filter. Dirt that can not  
be removed with a blower can only be removed  
by Nikon-authorized service personnel. Under  
no circumstances should you touch or wipe the  
fi lt e r.  
Turn the camera off. The mirror will return to the down position and the  
shutter curtain will close. Replace the lens or body cap.  
6
Foreign Matter on the Low-Pass Filter  
Nikon takes every possible precaution to prevent foreign matter from coming into contact  
with the low-pass filter during production and shipping. The D200, however, is designed  
to be used with interchangeable lenses, and foreign matter may enter the camera when  
lenses are removed or exchanged. Once inside the camera, this foreign matter may adhere  
to the low-pass filter, where it may appear in photographs taken under certain conditions.  
To prevent foreign matter from entering the camera, do not exchange lenses in dusty envi-  
ronments. To protect the camera when no lens is in place, be sure to replace the body cap  
provided with the camera, being careful to first remove all dust and other foreign matter  
that may be adhering to the body cap.  
Should foreign matter find its way onto the low-pass filter, clean the low-pass filter as in-  
structed on pages 185–186 of this manual, or have the low-pass filter cleaned by autho-  
rized Nikon service personnel. Photographs affected by the presence of foreign matter on  
the low-pass filter can be retouched using Nikon Capture 4 Version 4.4 or later (available  
separately) or the clean image options available in some third-party imaging software.  
Servicing the Camera and Accessories  
The D200 is a precision device and requires regular servicing. Nikon recommends that the  
camera be inspected by the original retailer or Nikon service representative once every  
one to two years, and that it be serviced once every three to five years (note that fees ap-  
ply to these services). Frequent inspection and servicing are particularly recommended if  
the camera is used professionally. Any accessories regularly used with the camera, such  
as lenses or optional Speedlights, should be included when the camera is inspected or  
serviced.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
186  
Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions  
Do not drop  
Do not touch the shutter curtain  
The product may malfunction if subjected to The shutter curtain is extremely thin and eas-  
strong shocks or vibration.  
ily damaged. Under no circumstances should  
you exert pressure on the curtain, poke it with  
cleaning tools, or subject it to powerful air  
currents from a blower. These actions could  
scratch, deform, or tear the curtain.  
Keep dry  
This product is not waterproof, and may mal-  
function if immersed in water or exposed to  
high levels of humidity. Rusting of the internal  
mechanism can cause irreparable damage.  
Handle all moving parts with care  
Do not apply force to the battery-chamber,  
card-slot, or connector covers. These parts are  
especially susceptible to damage.  
Avoid sudden changes in temperature  
Sudden changes in temperature, such as occur  
when entering or leaving a heated building on  
a cold day, can cause condensation inside the Cleaning  
device. To prevent condensation, place the de- • When cleaning the camera body, use a blow-  
vice in a carrying case or a plastic bag before  
exposing it to sudden changes in temperature.  
er to remove dust and lint, then wipe gently  
with a soft, dry cloth. After using your cam-  
era at the beach or seaside, wipe off any sand  
or salt using a cloth lightly dampened with  
pure water and then dry your camera thor-  
oughly. In rare instances, static electricity  
produced by a brush or cloth may cause the  
LCD displays to light up or darken. This does  
not indicate a malfunction, and the display  
will shortly return to normal.  
• When cleaning the lens and mirror, remember  
that these elements are easily damaged.  
Dust and lint should be gently removed with  
a blower. When using an aerosol blower,  
keep the can vertical (tilting the can could  
result in liquid being sprayed on the mirror).  
If you do get a fingerprint or other stain on  
the lens, apply a small amount of lens cleaner  
to a soft cloth and wipe the lens carefully.  
• SeeCleaning the Low-Pass Filterfor informa-  
tion on cleaning the low-pass filter ( 185).  
Keep away from strong magnetic fields  
Do not use or store this device in the vicinity  
of equipment that generates strong electro-  
magnetic radiation or magnetic fields. Strong  
static charges or the magnetic fields produced  
by equipment such as radio transmitters could  
interfere with the monitor, damage data stored  
on the memory card, or affect the product’s in-  
ternal circuitry.  
Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun  
Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun or  
another sight source for an extended period.  
Intense light may cause the image sensor to  
deteriorate or produce a white blur effect in  
photographs.  
Blooming  
Vertical white streaks may appear in photo-  
graphs of the sun or other strong light sources.  
This phenomenon, known as “blooming,” can  
be prevented by reducing the amount of light  
that falls on the image sensor, either by choos-  
ing a slow shutter speed and small aperture or  
by using an ND filter.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
187  
Storage  
Turn the product off before removing or disconnecting  
• To prevent mold or mildew, store the camera the power source  
in a dry, well-ventilated area. If you will not be Do not unplug the product or remove the bat-  
using the product for long periods, remove tery while the product is on, or while images  
the battery to prevent leakage and store the are being recorded or deleted. Forcibly cutting  
camera in a plastic bag containing a desiccant. power to the product in these circumstances  
Do not, however, store the camera case in a could result in loss of data or in damage to  
plastic bag, as this may cause the material to product memory or internal circuitry. To pre-  
deteriorate. Note that desiccant gradually loses vent an accidental interruption of power, avoid  
its capacity to absorb moisture and should be carrying the product from one location to an-  
replaced at regular intervals.  
other while the AC adapter is connected.  
• Do not store the camera with naphtha or  
camphor moth balls, close to equipment  
that produces strong magnetic fields, or in  
areas subject to extremes of temperature, for  
example near a space heater or in a closed  
vehicle on a hot day.  
• To prevent mold or mildew, take the camera  
out of storage at least once a month. Turn  
the camera on and release the shutter a few  
times before putting the camera away again.  
• Store the battery in a cool, dry place. Replace  
the terminal cover before putting the battery  
away.  
Batteries  
• Dirt on the battery terminals can prevent the  
camera from functioning.  
• When you turn the device on, check the bat-  
tery-level displayed in the control panel to  
determine whether the battery needs to be  
recharged or replaced. The battery needs to  
be recharged or replaced when the battery-  
level indicator is flashing.  
• When taking photographs on important oc-  
casions, ready a spare EN-EL3e battery and  
keep it fully charged. Depending on your  
location, you may find it difficult to purchase  
replacement batteries on short notice.  
Notes on the monitor  
• The monitor may contain a few pixels that • On cold days, the capacity of batteries tends  
are always lit or that do not light. This is a  
characteristic common to all TFT LCD moni-  
tors and does not indicate a malfunction. Im-  
ages recorded with the product will not be  
affected.  
• Images in the monitor may be difficult to see  
in a bright light.  
• Do not apply pressure to the monitor; this  
to decrease. Be sure the battery is fully  
charged before taking photographs outside  
in cold weather. Keep a spare battery in a  
warm place and exchange the two as nec-  
essary. Once warmed, a cold battery may  
recover some of its charge.  
• Continuing to charge the battery after it is ful-  
ly charged can impair battery performance.  
could cause damage or malfunction. Dust or • Should the battery terminals become dirty,  
lint on the monitor can be removed with a  
blower. Stains can be removed by rubbing  
wipe them off with a clean, dry cloth before  
use.  
the surface lightly with a soft cloth or cham- • After removing the battery from the camera,  
ois leather. be sure to replace the terminal cover.  
• Should the monitor break, care should be • Used batteries are a valuable resource. Please  
taken to avoid injury due to broken glass and  
to prevent the liquid crystal from the moni-  
tor touching the skin or entering the eyes or  
mouth.  
recycle used batteries in accord with local  
regulations.  
• Replace the monitor cover when transporting  
the camera or leaving it unattended.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
188  
Troubleshooting  
If the camera fails to function as expected, check the list of common problems  
below before consulting your retailer or Nikon representative. Refer to the page  
numbers in the right-most column for more information.  
Problem  
Solution  
105,  
133  
16  
181  
10  
Camera takes time to turn on.  
Delete files or folders.  
• Adjust viewfinder focus.  
• Use optional diopter adjustment lens.  
Charge battery or insert charged battery.  
Viewfinder is out of focus.  
Viewfinder is dark.  
Displays turn off without warning. Choose longer monitor off or meter off delays. 157  
Unusual characters displayed in con- See “A Note on Electronically Controlled Cam-  
trol panel  
eras,below.  
Displays in control panel or viewfind- Displays are affected by high or low tempera-  
7
er are slow and dim  
tures.  
• Fine lines around active focus area  
in viewfinder  
• Viewfinder display turns red  
These phenomena are normal and do not indi-  
cate a malfunction.  
14  
Playback menu is unavailable.  
Insert memory card.  
Insert memory card. Battery Info option is 14  
only available when using EN-EL3e batteries. 123  
Menu item is unavailable.  
Image size can not be changed.  
NEF (RAW) selected for image quality.  
• Aperture not locked at highest f/-number.  
• Memory card is full or not inserted.  
• Flash is charging.  
28  
8
14  
79  
20  
Shutter release is disabled.  
• Camera is not in focus.  
• Exposure mode S selected with  
ed for shutter speed.  
select- 64,  
68  
A Note on Electronically-Controlled Cameras  
In extremely rare instances, unusual characters may appear in the control panel and the  
camera may stop functioning. In most cases, this phenomenon is caused by a strong ex-  
ternal static charge. Turn the camera off, remove and replace the battery (note that the  
battery may be hot), and turn the camera on again, or, if you are using an AC adapter (avail-  
able separately), disconnect and reconnect the adapter and turn the camera on again. In  
the event of continued malfunction, contact your retailer or Nikon representative. Note  
that disconnecting the power source as described above may result in loss of any data not  
recorded to the memory card at the time the problem occurred. Data already recorded to  
the card will not be affected.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
189  
Problem  
Solution  
• Unlock focus area selector.  
• Closest subject priority is in effect.  
• Monitor is on: camera in playback mode.  
53  
54  
98  
Can not select focus area.  
• Exposure meters are off: press shutter-release 16  
button halfway.  
• Camera is in focus mode C.  
51  
• Center focus area or focus area group is not 53,  
selected or closest priority is selected for 54,  
group dynamic-area AF.  
149  
AF-assist illuminator does not light. Off selected for Custom Setting a9 (AF As- 152  
sist).  
• Illuminator has turned off automatically. Il- 58  
luminator may become hot with continued  
use; wait for lamp to cool down.  
Flash in use. Flash sync speed can be selected  
using Custom Setting e1 (Flash Sync Speed);  
Full range of shutter speeds not avail-  
when using optional SB-800, SB-600, or SB- 160  
able.  
R200 Speedlight, choose 1/250 s (Auto FP) for  
full range of shutter speeds.  
Focus does not lock when shutter-re- Camera is in focus mode C: use AE-L/AF-L button  
56  
lease button is pressed halfway.  
to lock focus.  
Area shown in viewfinder is smaller Viewfinder has vertical and horizontal frame  
51  
than final photo.  
coverage of about 95%.  
• Rotate focus-mode selector to S or C.  
Photos are out of focus.  
• Camera unable to focus using autofocus: use 56,  
manual focus or focus lock.  
60  
Recording time increases.  
Turn noise reduction off.  
131  
• Choose lower ISO sensitivity or turn high ISO 33,  
Randomly-spaced bright pixels (“noise”) noise reduction on. 131  
appear in photos.  
• Shutter speed is slower than 8s: use long ex- 131  
posure noise reduction.  
• Clean lens.  
• Clean low-pass filter.  
• Adjust white balance to match light source. 35  
• Adjust Optimize Image settings.  
Lower flash.  
Photo taken at image quality of NEF+JPEG.  
Subject is too dark or too bright.  
184  
185  
Blotches appear on photos.  
Colors are unnatural.  
45  
78  
28  
41  
Continuous shooting unavailable.  
RAW image is not played back.  
Can not measure white balance.  
Image can not be selected as source  
for preset white balance.  
Image was not created with D200.  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
190  
Problem  
Solution  
• NEF (RAW) or NEF+JPEG image quality option 43  
selected for image quality.  
White balance bracketing unavail-  
able.  
• White balance set to  
Temp.) or  
(Choose Color 38,  
(White Balance Preset).  
40  
• Multiple exposure is being recorded.  
86  
Select Custom and choose setting other than  
Auto for Image Sharpening, Tone Compen- 45  
sation, and Saturation.  
Results for Optimize Image vary  
from shot to shot.  
Metering can not be changed.  
Exposure compensation can not be  
used.  
Autoexposure lock is in effect.  
Choose exposure mode P, S, or A.  
• Select On for Rotate Tall.  
70  
62  
142  
• Photo was taken with Off selected for Auto 119  
Image Rotation.  
• Camera orientation was changed while shut- 27  
ter-release button was pressed in continuous  
mode.  
Tall(portrait-orientation) photos are  
displayed inwide(landscape) orien-  
tation.  
• Camera was pointed up or down when shot 119  
was taken.  
Can not delete photo.  
Photo is protected: remove protection.  
104  
Select All for Playback Folder. Note that Cur-  
rent will automatically be selected when next 135  
photo is taken.  
Some photos are not displayed dur-  
ing playback.  
Message is displayed stating that no  
images are available for playback.  
Select All for Playback Folder.  
135  
105,  
133  
Can not change print order.  
Memory card is full: delete photos.  
Can not print pictures via direct USB  
connection.  
Set USB to PTP.  
121  
Photo is a RAW (NEF) image. Transfer picture to  
computer and use supplied software or Nikon 107,  
Capture 4 Version 4.4 or later (available sepa- 182  
rately) to print photo.  
Can not select photo for printing.  
Photo is not displayed on TV.  
Choose correct video mode.  
117  
121  
121  
12  
Can not copy photos to computer. Choose correct USB option.  
Can not use Camera Control.  
Date of recording is not correct.  
Set USB to PTP.  
Set camera clock.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
191  
Camera Error Messages and Displays  
This section lists the indicators and error messages that appear in the viewfinder,  
control panel, and monitor when there is a problem with the camera.  
Indicator  
Control View-  
panel fi nder  
Problem  
Solution  
Lens aperture ring is not locked Lock ring at minimum aperture  
8
(blinks)  
at minimum aperture.  
Low battery.  
(largest f/-number).  
Ready fully-charged spare battery. 10  
• Recharge or exchange with 10  
fully-charged spare battery.  
• Battery exhausted.  
(blinks) (blinks) • Battery information not avail- • Battery can not be used in cam- 11  
able.  
era.  
Camera clock is not set.  
No lens attached, or non-CPU lens  
Set camera clock.  
12  
(blinks)  
attached without specifying maxi- Aperture value will be displayed 67,  
mum aperture. Aperture shown in if maximum aperture is specified. 69  
stops from maximum aperture.  
Camera unable to focus using  
autofocus.  
(blinks)  
Focus manually.  
60  
33  
• Choose lower sensitivity.  
• Use optional Neutral Density 181  
(ND) filter  
• In exposure mode:  
Subject too bright; photo will be  
overexposed.  
S Increase shutter speed  
64  
A Choose smaller aperture 66  
(larger f/-number)  
• Choose a higher sensitivity (ISO 33  
equivalency)  
• Use optional Speedlight  
• In exposure mode:  
S Lower shutter speed  
177  
Subject too dark; photo will be  
underexposed.  
64  
A Choose  
(smaller f/-number)  
selected in mode M and Change shutter speed or select 64,  
a
larger aperture 66  
(blinks)  
(blinks)  
mode dial rotated to S.  
Speedlight that does not support  
i-TTL flash control attached and  
set to TTL.  
mode M.  
68  
Change flash mode setting on  
optional Speedlight.  
178  
(blinks)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
192  
Indicator  
Control View-  
panel fi nder  
Problem  
Solution  
Memory insufficient to record • Reduce quality or size.  
further photos at current set- • Delete photographs.  
(blinks) tings, or camera has run out of  
28  
105,  
133  
14  
(blinks)  
fi le or folder numbers.  
• Insert new memory card.  
Insert memory card.  
(blinks) No memory card.  
14  
Release shutter. If error persists  
or appears frequently, consult  
with Nikon-authorized service  
representative.  
Camera malfunction.  
viii  
(blinks)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
193  
Indicator  
Control View-  
Monitor  
panel fi nder  
Problem  
Solution  
NO CARD  
PRESENT  
Camera cannot detect Turn camera off and confirm  
(blinks)  
14  
memory card.  
that card is correctly inserted.  
• Error accessing memory • Use Nikon-approved card. 183  
card.  
• Check that contacts are viii  
clean. If card is damaged,  
contact retailer or Nikon  
representative.  
THIS CARD  
CAN NOT BE  
USED  
(blinks)  
(blinks)  
• Unable to create new • Delete files or insert new 14,  
folder.  
memory card.  
105,  
133  
CARD IS NOT  
FORMATTED  
(displayed  
when but-  
ton is pressed)  
FOLDER  
Memory card has not  
been formatted for use in Format memory card.  
D200.  
14,  
116  
• Memory card contains • Insert another card.  
no images.  
14  
CONTAINS NO  
IMAGES  
• Current folder is empty. • Set Playback Folder to All. 135  
Set Playback Folder to All  
or use Hide Image to reveal  
hidden photos.  
ALL IMAGES  
HIDDEN  
All photos in current fold-  
er are hidden.  
135,  
137  
FILE DOES  
NOT  
File has been created or  
14,  
modified using  
a
com- Delete file or reformat mem- 105,  
CONTAIN  
IMAGE DATA  
puter or different make of ory card.  
camera, or file is corrupt.  
116,  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
194  
Appendix  
The Appendix covers the following topics:  
Topic  
Exposure Program (Mode P)  
Memory Card Capacity and Image Quality/Size  
Bracketing Programs  
Fine Tuning and Color Temperature  
Flash Range, Aperture, and Sensitivity  
Lenses That Can Be Used with the Built-in Flash  
Supported Standards  
195  
196  
197–199  
200  
200  
201  
202  
Exposure Program (Mode P)  
The exposure program for mode P is shown in the following graph:  
ISO 200; lens with maximum aperture of f/1.4 and  
minimum aperture of f/16 (e.g., AF 50mm f/1.4 D)  
F1  
F1.4  
F2  
F2.8  
F4  
F5.6  
F8  
F11  
F16  
F22  
F32  
8"  
30" 15"  
4" 2" 1"  
2
4
8
15 30 60 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000  
Shutter speed  
The maximum and minimum values for EV vary with sensitivity (ISO equivalency); the  
above graph assumes a sensitivity of ISO 200 equivalent. When matrix metering is used,  
values over 161  
/
3 EV are reduced to 161  
3 EV.  
/
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
195  
Memory Card Capacity and Image Quality/Size  
The following table shows the approximate number of pictures that can be  
stored on a 1GB SanDisk SDCFX (Extreme III) series card at different image quality  
and size settings.  
Image quality  
Image size  
File size (MB)1  
20.7  
18.6  
17.1  
18.3  
17.2  
16.5  
17.1  
16.5  
16.2  
15.8  
4.8  
No. of images1 Buffer capacity1, 2  
L6  
M6  
S6  
L6  
M6  
S6  
L6  
M6  
S6  
L
44  
49  
19  
19  
19  
19  
19  
19  
19  
19  
19  
22  
37  
56  
74  
54  
74  
76  
57  
75  
76  
NEF+JPEG Fine3, 4, 5  
55  
50  
54  
57  
NEF+JPEG Normal3, 4, 5  
55  
57  
58  
60  
NEF+JPEG Basic3, 4, 5  
NEF (RAW)  
167  
294  
650  
332  
578  
1200  
650  
1100  
2200  
JPEG Fine5, 7  
M
S
L
M
S
L
2.7  
1.2  
2.4  
1.4  
0.63  
1.2  
0.7  
JPEG Normal5, 7  
JPEG Basic5, 7  
M
S
0.33  
1 All figures are approximate. File size varies with scene recorded and make of memory  
card.  
2 Maximum number of frames that can be stored in memory buffer at ISO 100. Capacity of  
memory buffer will drop if noise reduction is on.  
3 Total for NEF and JPEG images.  
4 Figures assume RAW Compression is set to NEF (RAW). Selecting Comp. NEF (RAW)  
decreases file size of NEF (RAW) images by approximately forty to fifty percent; although  
camera displays do not change, number of images that can be recorded increases.  
5 Figures assume JPEG Compression is set to Size Priority. Selecting Optimal Quality  
increases file size of JPEG images by up to eighty percent; number of images and buffer  
capacity drop accordingly.  
6 Applies to JPEG images only. Size of NEF (RAW) images can not be changed.  
7 Regardless of option chosen for JPEG Compression, camera never shows more than 25  
frames remaining in buffer, even when more shots can be stored.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
196  
Bracketing Programs  
The following bracketing programs are available when WB Bracketing is se-  
lected for Custom Setting e5 (Auto BKT Set).  
Control panel display  
No. of shots  
WB increment  
Bracketing order  
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
5
5
5
7
7
7
9
9
9
+1  
+2  
+3  
–1  
–2  
–3  
+1  
+2  
+3  
–1  
–2  
–3  
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
+1, 0, +2  
+2, 0, +4  
3, 0, 6  
–1, –2, 0  
–2, –4, 0  
–3, –6, 0  
0, +1  
0, +2  
0, +3  
0, –1  
0, –2  
0, –3  
0, –1, +1  
0, –2, +2  
0, –3, +3  
0, –2, –1, +1, +2  
0, –4, –2, +2, +4  
0, –6, –3, +3, +6  
0, –3, –2, –1, +1, +2, +3  
0, –6, –4, –2, +2, +4, +6  
0, –9, –6, –3, +3, +6, +9  
0, –4, –3, –2, –1, +1, +2, +3, +4  
0, –8, –6, –4, –2, +2, +4, +6, +8  
0, –12, –9, –6, –3, +3, +6, +9, +12  
1
2
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
197  
The programs are available when AE & Flash, AE Only or Flash Only is selected  
for Custom Setting e5 (Auto BKT Set) depend on the option selected for Cus-  
tom Setting b3 (EV Step).  
1/3 Step Selected for EV Step  
No. of Exposure  
Control panel display  
shots increment  
Bracketing order (EVs)  
/
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
5
5
5
7
7
7
9
9
9
+   
+0.3, 0, +0.7  
+0.7, 0, +1.3  
1.0, 0, 2.0  
–0.3, –0.7, 0  
–0.7, –1.3, 0  
–1.0, –2.0, 0  
0, +0.3  
0, +0.7  
0, +1  
0, –0.3  
0, –0.7  
0, –1  
0, –0.3, +0.3  
0, –0.7, +0.7  
0, –1, +1  
/
+   
+1  
/
–   
/
–   
–1  
/
+   
/
+   
+1  
/
–   
/
–   
–1  
/
   
/
   
1
/
   
/
   
1
/
   
/
   
1
/
   
/
   
0, –0.7, –0.3, +0.3, +0.7  
0, –1.3, –0.7, +0.7, +1.3  
0, –2.0, –1, +1, +2.0  
0, –1.0, –0.7, –0.3, +0.3, +0.7, +1.0  
0, –2.0, –1.3, –0.7, +0.7, +1.3, +2.0  
0, –3.0, –2.0, –1.0, +1.0, +2.0, +3.0  
0, –1.3, –1.0, –0.7, –0.3, +0.3, +0.7, +1.0, +1.3  
0, –2.7, –2.0, –1.3, –0.7, +0.7, +1.3, +2.0, +2.7  
0, –4.0, –3.0, –2.0, –1.0, +1.0, +2.0, +3.0, +4.0  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
198  
1/2 Step Selected for EV Step  
Control panel display  
No. of Exposure  
shots increment  
Bracketing order (EVs)  
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
3
3
5
5
7
7
9
9
+/  
+1  
–/  
–1  
+/  
+1  
–/  
–1  
/  
1
/  
1
/  
+0.5, 0, +1.0  
1.0, 0, 2.0  
–0.5, –1.0, 0  
–1.0, –2.0, 0  
0, +0.5  
0, +1  
0, –0.5  
0, –1  
0, –0.5, +0.5  
0, –1, +1  
0, –1.0, –0.5, +0.5, +1.0  
0, –2.0, –1, +1, +2.0  
0, –1.5, –1.0, –0.5, +0.5, +1.0, +1.5  
0, –3.0, –2.0, –1.0, +1.0, +2.0, +3.0  
0, –2.0, –1.5, –1.0, –0.5, +0.5, +1.0, +1.5, +2.0  
0, –4.0, –3.0, –2.0, –1.0, +1.0, +2.0, +3.0, +4.0  
1
/  
1
1 Step Selected for EV Step  
Control panel display  
No. of Exposure  
shots increment  
Bracketing order (EVs)  
3
3
2
2
3
5
7
9
+1  
–1  
+1  
–1  
1
1
1
1
1.0, 0, 2.0  
–1.0, –2.0, 0  
0, +1  
0, –1  
0, –1, +1  
0, –2.0, –1, +1, +2.0  
0, –3.0, –2.0, –1.0, +1.0, +2.0, +3.0  
0, –4.0, –3.0, –2.0, –1.0, +1.0, +2.0, +3.0, +4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
199  
Fine-Tuning and Color Temperature  
Approximate color-temperatures for settings other than A (auto) are given below  
(values may differ from color temperatures given by photo color meters):  
Direct  
sunlight  
4,800K  
4,900K  
5,000K  
5,200K  
5,300K  
5,400K  
5,600K  
Cloudy  
(daylight)  
5,400K  
5,600K  
5,800K  
6,000K  
6,200K  
6,400K  
6,600K  
Shade  
(daylight)  
6,700K  
7,100K  
7,500K  
8,000K  
8,400K  
8,800K  
9,200K  
Incandescent  
2,700K  
2,800K  
2,900K  
3,000K  
3,100K  
3,200K  
3,300K  
Fluorescent*  
2,700K  
3,000K  
3,700K  
4,200K  
5,000K  
6,500K  
7,200K  
Flash  
+3  
+2  
+1  
0
–1  
–2  
–3  
4,800K  
5,000K  
5,200K  
5,400K  
5,600K  
5,800K  
6,000K  
* The size of the increments for Fluorescent refl ects the wide variations in color tempera-  
ture among the many different types of fluorescent light source, ranging from low-tem-  
perature stadium lighting to high-temperature mercury-vapor lamps.  
Flash Range, Aperture, and Sensitivity  
Flash range varies with sensitivity (ISO equivalency) and aperture.  
Aperture at ISO equivalent of  
Range  
100 125 160 200 250 320 400 500 640 800 1000 1250 1600  
m
ft.  
1.4 1.6 1.8  
2.2 2.5 2.8 3.2 3.5  
2.8 3.2 3.5 4.5  
4.5 5.6 6.3 7.1  
5.6 6.3 7.1 10 11 13 14 16 18 20 22 0.6–1.9 2.0–6.2  
10 11 13 14 16 18 20 22 25 29 32 0.6–1.4 2.0–4.6  
2
2.2 2.5 2.8 3.2 3.5  
4.5  
5.6 6.3 7.1  
10 11 13 14 16 0.6–2.7 2.0–8.9  
4
4.5  
5.6 6.3 7.1  
10 11 0.6–3.8 2.0–12.5  
5
5.6 1.0–7.5 3.3–24.6  
2
4
5
8
0.7–5.4 2.3–17.7  
4
5
8
9
4
5
8
9
8
9
8
9
11 13 14 16 18 20 22 25 29 32  
16 18 20 22 25 29 32 —  
0.6–0.9 2.0–2.9  
0.6–0.7 2.0–2.3  
In programmed auto, the maximum aperture (minimum f/-number) is limited  
according to sensitivity (ISO equivalency), as shown below:  
Maximum aperture at ISO equivalent of:  
100  
2.8  
125  
3
160  
3.2  
200  
3.3  
250  
3.5  
320  
3.8  
400  
4
500  
4.2  
640  
4.5  
800  
4.8  
1000 1250 1600  
5.3 5.6  
5
For each one-step increase in sensitivity (e.g., from 200 to 400), aperture is  
stopped down by half an f/-stop. If the maximum aperture of the lens is smaller  
than given above, the maximum value for aperture will be the maximum aper-  
ture of the lens.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
200  
Lenses That Can Be Used with the Built-in Flash  
The built-in flash can be used with any CPU lens with a focal length of 18–300mm.  
Note that the flash may be unable to light the entire subject if the following  
lenses are not used at or above the minimum ranges given below:  
Lens  
Zoom position  
18mm  
20mm  
24mm  
24mm  
18mm  
18mm  
20mm  
28mm  
35mm  
Minimum Range  
1.5m/4ft. 11in.  
1.0m/3ft. 3in.  
1.0m/3ft. 3in.  
1.0m/3ft. 3in.  
1.5m/4ft. 11in.  
1.0m/3ft. 3in.  
1.0m/3ft. 3in.  
1.5m/4ft. 11in.  
1.0m/3ft. 3in.  
AF-S DX ED 12–24mm f/4G  
AF-S ED 17–35mm f/2.8D  
AF-S DX IF ED 17–55mm f/2.8G  
AF ED 18–35mm f/3.5–4.5D  
AF-S DX VR ED 18–200mm f/3.5–5.6G  
AF 20–35mm f/2.8D  
AF-S ED 28–70mm f/2.8D  
The built-in flash can also be used with Ai-S, Ai, and Ai-modified non-CPU lenses with a  
focal length of 18–200mm. Restrictions apply to the following lenses:  
• Ai 50–300mm f/4.5, Ai-modified 50–300mm f/4.5, and Ai-S ED 50–300mm f/4.5: use at  
135mm and above  
• Ai ED 50–300mm f/4.5: use at 105mm and above  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
201  
Supported Standards  
DCF Version 2.0: Design Rule for Camera File System (DCF) is standard widely used  
in the digital camera industry to ensure compatibility among different makes of  
camera.  
DPOF: Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) is an industry-wide standard that allows  
pictures to be printed from print orders stored on the memory card.  
Exif version 2.21: The D200 supports Exif (Exchangeable Image File Format for  
Digital Still Cameras) version 2.21, a standard that allows information stored with  
photographs to be used for optimal color reproduction when images are output  
on Exif-compliant printers.  
PictBridge: A standard developed by in cooperation with the digital camera and  
printer industries, allowing photographs to be output directly to a printer with-  
out connecting the camera to a computer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
202  
Specifications  
Type  
Single-lens reflex digital camera with interchangeable lenses  
Effective pixels  
10.2 million  
CCD  
23.6×15.8 mm; total pixels: 10.92 million  
Image size (pixels)  
• 3872×2592 (Large)  
• 1936×1296 (Small)  
• 2896×1944 (Medium)  
Lens mount  
Nikon F mount (with AF coupling and AF contacts)  
Compatible lenses*  
Type G or D AF Nikkor  
All functions supported  
Micro Nikkor 85 mm f/2.8D All functions supported except autofocus and some exposure  
modes  
Other AF Nikkor†  
AI-P Nikkor  
Non-CPU  
All functions supported except 3D color matrix metering II and  
3D multi-sensor balanced fill-flash for digital SLR  
All functions supported except 3D color matrix metering II, 3D  
multi-sensor balanced fill-flash for digital SLR, and autofocus  
Can be used in exposure modes A and M; electronic range  
fi nder can be used if maximum aperture is f/5.6 or faster; color  
matrix metering, multi-sensor balanced fill-flash for digital SLR,  
and aperture value display supported if user provides lens data  
* IX Nikkor lenses can not be used  
† Excluding lenses for F3AF  
Picture angle  
Equivalent in 35-mm format is approximately 1.5 times lens fo-  
cal length  
Viewfi nder  
Diopter adjustment  
Eyepoint  
Optical fixed eye-level pentaprism  
–2.0+1.0m–1  
19.5mm (–1.0m–1)  
Focusing screen  
Type B BriteView clear matte screen Mark II with superimposed  
focus brackets and On-Demand grid lines  
Approximately 95% of lens (vertical and horizontal)  
Approximately 0.94× (50-mm lens at infinity; –1.0m–1)  
Frame coverage  
Magnification  
Reflex mirror  
Quick return  
Lens aperture  
Instant return with depth-of-field preview  
Focus-area selection  
Normal: 11 areas; single area or group can be selected  
Wide: focus area can be selected from 7 areas  
Lens servo  
Instant single-servo AF (S); continuous-servo AF (C); manual  
(M); predictive focus tracking automatically activated according  
to subject status in continuous-servo AF  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
203  
Autofocus  
TTL phase detection by Nikon Multi-CAM1000 autofocus sen-  
sor module  
Detection range  
AF-area mode  
1+19EV (ISO 100 at 20°C/68°F)  
Single-area AF, dynamic-area AF, group dynamic-AF, dynamic-  
area AF with closest subject priority  
Focus lock  
Focus can be locked by pressing shutter-release button halfway  
(single-servo AF) or by pressing AE-L/AF-L button  
Exposure  
Metering  
Matrix  
Three-mode through-the-lens (TTL) exposure metering  
3D color matrix metering II (type G and D lenses); color matrix  
metering II (other CPU lenses); color matrix metering available  
with non-CPU lenses if user provides lens data; metering per-  
formed by 1,005-segment RGB sensor  
Center-weighted  
Spot  
Weight of 75% given to 6, 8, 10, or 13-mm circle in center of  
frame  
Meters 3-mm circle (about 2.0% of frame) centered on active  
focus area (on center focus area when non-CPU lens is used)  
Range  
0–20EV (3D color matrix or center-weighted metering)  
2–20EV (spot metering)  
(ISO 100 equivalent, f/1.4  
lens, 20 °C/68 °F)  
Exposure meter coupling  
Exposure control  
Operating mode  
Combined CPU and AI  
Programmed auto with flexible program; shutter-priority auto;  
aperture priority auto; manual  
Exposure compensation  
Bracketing  
5+5EV in increments of /, /, or 1EV  
Exposure and/or flash bracketing (2–9 exposures in increments  
of /, /, /, or 1EV)  
Exposure lock  
Luminosity locked at detected value with AE-L/AF-L button  
Shutter  
Speed  
Electronically-controlled vertical-travel focal-plane shutter  
30/s in steps of /, /, or 1EV, bulb  
ISO Sensitivity (Recom-  
1001600 in steps of /, /, or 1EV with additional settings up to  
mended Exposure Index) 1EV over 1600; auto gain to 1600  
White balance  
Bracketing  
Auto (TTL white-balance with 1,005 pixels RGB sensor), six  
manual modes with fine-tuning, color temperature setting, and  
preset white balance  
2–9 exposures in increments of 1, 2, or 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
204  
Built-in flash  
Guide number (m/ft at ISO  
100 and 20 °C/68 °F)  
Manual pop-up with button release  
Approximately 12/39 (manual 13/42)  
Flash  
Sync contact  
Flash control  
TTL  
X-contact only; flash synchronization at up to 1/250 s  
TTL flash control by 1,005-pixel RGB sensor  
SB-800, 600: i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital SLR and standard  
i-TTL flash for digital SLR  
Auto aperture  
Non-TTL auto  
Available with SB-800 with CPU lens  
Available with such Speedlights as SB-800, 80DX, 28DX, 28, 27,  
and 22s  
Range-priority manual  
Flash sync modes  
Available with SB-800  
Front curtain sync (normal), slow sync, rear-curtain sync, red-  
eye reduction, red-eye reduction with slow sync  
3+1EV in increments of / or /EV  
Lights when SB-series Speedlight such as 800, 600, 80DX, 28DX,  
50DX, 28, 27, or 22s is fully charged; blinks for 3s after flash is  
fi r ed at full output  
Flash compensation  
Flash-ready indicator  
Accessory shoe  
Nikon Creative  
Lighting System  
Standard ISO hot-shoe contact with safety lock  
With SB-800, 600 and R200, supports Advanced Wireless Light-  
ing (SB-600 and R200 only supports AWL when used as remote  
fl ash), Auto FP High-Speed Sync, Flash Color Information Com-  
munication, modeling illumination, and FV Lock  
Storage  
Media  
File system  
Type I and II CompactFlash memory cards; Microdrives  
Compliant with Design Rule for Camera File System (DCF) 2.0  
and Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)  
Compression  
NEF (RAW): compressed 12-bit  
JPEG: JPEG baseline-compliant  
Self-timer  
Electronically controlled timer with 220s duration  
Depth-of-field preview  
When CPU lens is attached, lens aperture can be stopped down  
to value selected by user (A and M modes) or value selected by  
camera (P, and S modes)  
Monitor  
2.5in., 230,000-dot, low-temperature polysilicon TFT LCD with  
brightness adjustment  
Video output  
Can be selected from NTSC and PAL  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
205  
External interface  
Tripod socket  
USB 2.0 Hi-speed  
¼ in. (ISO)  
Firmware upgrades  
Supported languages  
Firmware can be upgraded by user  
Chinese (Simplified and Traditional), Dutch, English, French,  
German, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Portuguese, Russian, Span-  
ish, Swedish  
Power source  
• One rechargeable Nikon EN-EL3e Li-ion battery; charging  
voltage (MH-18a quick charger): 7.4V DC  
• MB-D200 battery pack (available separately) with one or two  
rechargeable Nikon EN-EL3e Li-ion batteries or six LR6 alka-  
line, HR-6 NiMH, FR-6 lithium, or ZR6 nickel-manganese AA  
batteries  
• EH-6 AC adapter (available separately)  
Dimensions (W × H × D)  
Weight  
Approximately 147×113×74mm (5.8×4.4×2.9in.)  
Approximately 830g (1lb 13oz) without battery, memory card,  
body cap, or monitor cover  
Operating environment  
Temperature  
0–+40°C (+32104°F)  
Humidity  
Less than 85% (no condensation)  
• Unless otherwise stated, all figures are for a camera with a fully-charged battery operating  
at an ambient temperature of 20°C (68°F).  
• Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and software de-  
scribed this manual at any time and without prior notice. Nikon will not be held liable for  
damages that may result from any mistakes that this manual may contain.  
MH-18a Quick Charger  
Rated input  
AC 100–240V, 50/60Hz  
Rated output  
DC 8.4V/900mA  
Supported batteries  
Charging time  
EN-EL3e rechargeable Li-ion batteries  
Approximately 135 minutes  
Operating temperature  
Dimensions (W × H × D)  
Length of cord  
0–+40°C (+32104°F)  
Approximately 90×35×58mm (3.5×1.4×2.3in.)  
Approximately 1800mm (5ft. 11in.)  
Approximately 80g (2.8oz), excluding power cable  
Weight  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
206  
EN-EL3e Rechargeable Li-ion Battery  
Type  
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery  
Rated capacity  
Dimensions (W × H × D)  
Weight  
7.4V/1500mAh  
Approximately 39.5×56×21mm (1.6×2.2×0.8in.)  
Approximately 80g (2.8oz), excluding terminal cover  
Battery Life  
The number of shots that can be taken with a fully-charged EN-EL3e battery (1500mAh)  
varies with the condition of the batteries, temperature, and how the camera is used. The  
following measurements were performed at a temperature of 20°C (68°F).  
Example 1: 1800 shots  
Zoom Nikkor AF-S VR 70–200mm f/2.8G IF ED lens (VR o); continuous shooting mode;  
continuous-servo autofocus; image quality set to JPEG Basic; image size set to M; shutter  
speed /s; shutter-release pressed halfway for three seconds and focus cycled from infin-  
ity to minimum range three times with each shot; after six shots, monitor turned on for five  
seconds and then turned off; cycle repeated once exposure meters have turned off.  
Example 2: 340 shots  
Zoom Nikkor AF-S VR 24–120mm f/3.5–5.6G IF ED lens (VR o); single-frame shooting  
mode; single-servo autofocus; image quality set to JPEG Normal; image size set to L; shutter  
speed /s; shutter-release pressed halfway for five seconds and focus cycled from infinity  
to minimum range once with each shot; built-in Speedlight fired at full power with every  
other shot; AF-assist illuminator lights when Speedlight is used; cycle repeated once expo-  
sure meters have turned off; camera turned off for one minute with every ten shots.  
The following can reduce battery life:  
• Using the monitor  
• Repeated autofocus operations  
• Keeping the shutter-release button • Taking NEF (RAW) photographs  
pressed halfway  
• Slow shutter speeds  
To ensure maximum battery performance:  
• Keep the battery contacts clean. Soiled contacts can reduce battery performance.  
• Use EN-EL3e batteries immediately after charging. Batteries will lose their charge if left  
unused.  
The battery level displayed by the camera may vary with changes in temperature.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
207  
Index  
Menus  
PLAYBACK MENU, 133–142  
Delete, 133–134  
Playback Folder, 135  
Slide Show, 135–136  
Hide Image, 137–138  
Print Set, 139–140  
Display Mode, 141  
Image Review, 141  
After Delete, 142  
b2: ISO Step Value, 154  
b3: EV Step, 154  
Symbols  
3D color matrix metering II. See  
Metering  
b4: Exp Comp/Fine Tune, 154  
b5: Exposure Comp., 155  
b6: Center-Weighted, 155  
b7: Fine Tune Exposure, 156  
c1: AE Lock, 156  
c2: AE-L/AF-L, 156  
c3: Auto Meter-Off, 157  
c4: Self-Timer, 157  
A
Advanced Wireless Lighting, 163,  
177, 178  
AF-area mode, 54  
AF-assist illuminator, 58–59, 152  
Aperture, 62–69  
adjusting, 66–67  
maximum, 61, 67, 69, 93–95,  
195  
minimum, 8, 68, 122, 192, 195  
non-CPU lenses and, 61, 63,  
65, 67, 69, 93–95  
c5: Monitor-Off, 157  
d1: Beep, 158  
Rotate Tall, 142  
SHOOTING MENU, 124–132  
Shooting Menu Bank,  
125–126  
Menu Reset, 127  
Folders, 128  
File Naming, 129  
Optimize Image, 45–49  
Color Space, 50  
Image Quality, 28–29  
Image Size, 32  
JPEG Compression, 30  
RAW Compression, 31  
White Balance, 35–42  
Long Exp. NR, 131  
High ISO NR, 131  
ISO Sensitivity, 33–34  
Image Overlay, 84–85  
Multiple Exposure, 86–88  
Intvl Timer Shooting, 89–92  
Non-CPU Lens Data, 93–95  
CUSTOM SETTING MENU, 143–172  
C: Bank select, 146  
R: Menu Reset, 147  
a1: AF-C Mode Priority, 148  
a2: AF-S Mode Priority, 148  
a3: Focus Area Frame, 148  
a4: Group Dynamic AF,  
149–150  
d2: Grid Display, 158  
d3: Viewfinder Warning, 158  
d4: Shooting Speed, 158  
d5: Exp. Delay Mode, 158  
d6: File No. Sequence, 159  
d7: Illumination, 159  
d8: MB-D200 Batteries, 160  
e1: Flash Sync Speed, 160  
e2: Flash Shutter Speed, 161  
e3: Built-in Flash, 161–166  
e4: Modeling Flash, 166  
e5: Auto BKT Set, 166  
e6: Manual Mode Bkting,  
167  
e7: Auto BKT Order, 167  
e8: Auto BKT Selection, 167  
f1: Center Button, 168  
f2: Multi-Selector, 169  
f3: Photo Info/Playback, 169  
f4: FUNC. Button, 170  
f5: Command Dials, 170–171  
f6: Buttons and Dials, 172  
f7: No Memory card?, 172  
SET UP, 115–123  
value display, 5, 6  
Auto meter off, 16, 157  
Autoexposure lock, 70  
Autofocus, 51, 54, 148–152  
continuous-servo, 51  
focus tracking, 51, 52  
single-area AF, 54  
single-servo, 51  
Auto FP high-speed sync, 77,  
160, 178  
B
Backlight, control panel, 5, 159  
BASIC. See Image quality  
Battery,  
inserting, 10–11  
life, 207  
storage, ii–iii, 188  
Black-and-white, 6, 45  
Blur, reducing, 26, 77, 83. See also  
Exposure delay mode; Mirror-  
up mode  
Bulb. See Long time exposures  
Bracketing, 43–44, 73–75,  
166–167, 198–199. See also  
Exposure bracketing; White  
balance, bracketing  
Brightness. See Monitor, bright-  
ness of  
Format, 116  
LCD Brightness, 116  
Mirror Lock-up, 117  
Video Mode, 117  
World Time, 12–13  
Language, 12, 118  
Image Comment, 118  
Auto Image Rotation, 119  
Recent Settings, 119–120  
USB, 121  
Dust Off Ref Photo, 121–122  
Battery Info, 123  
a5: Lock-On, 150  
a6: AF Activation, 151  
a7: AF Area Illumination,  
151  
a8: Focus Area, 151  
a9: AF Assist, 152  
a10: AF-ON for MB-D200,  
152  
b1: ISO Auto, 152–153  
Firmware Version, 123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
208  
C
E
I
C. See Autofocus, continuous-  
servo  
Electronic analog exposure  
display, 69, 72  
Illuminator. See Backlight,  
control panel  
Camera Control, 107, 121  
CH. See Shooting mode  
CL. See Shooting mode  
Clock-calendar, 117  
Closest subject priority. See AF- Exposure compensation, 72,  
area mode  
Color temperature. See White  
balance  
CompactFlash. See Memory  
card  
Compression. See Image quality  
Computer, 107–109  
Continuous shooting mode,  
26–27  
Contrast. See SHOOTING MENU,  
Optimize Image  
Electronic range finder, 60  
Exif version 2.21, 50, 139, 202  
Exposure bracketing, 73–75, 166,  
198–199  
Image dust off, 121–122  
Image sensor, 28, 185, 187  
Image size, 32  
Image quality, 28–31  
ISO auto, 152–153  
ISO sensitivity, 18, 33–34  
i-TTL flash control, 76, 78, 178  
154, 155  
Exposure delay mode, 158  
Exposure meters, 16, 157. See  
also Auto meter off  
Exposure mode, 62–69  
aperture-priority auto, 66–67  
manual, 68–69  
J
JPEG, 28–29, 30  
L
L. See Image size  
Lens, 1, 8, 58, 93–95, 174–176,  
184  
programmed auto, 63  
shutter-priority auto, 64–65  
attaching, 8  
F
compatible, 174–176  
CPU, 1, 61, 62, 174, 176  
non-CPU, 93–95, 132, 174–175  
type D, 18, 176  
type G, 18, 176  
Long time-exposures, 68, 131  
Low-pass filter, 185–186  
FINE. See Image quality  
Flash, 76–80. See also Speedlight  
bracketing, 73–75  
Flash Color Information Com-  
munication, 177, 178  
Flash-ready indicator, 78–79, 83  
Flash sync mode, 77  
Flexible program, 63. See also  
Exposure mode, programmed  
auto  
CPU lenses, 61, 62, 63, 174–175  
Creative Lighting System, 160,  
166, 170, 177–179  
Custom Settings, 143–172  
defaults, 147  
menu banks, 146  
M
D
M. See Exposure mode, manual;  
Manual focus; Image size  
Daylight saving time, 13  
DCF version 2.0. See Design rule  
for Camera File system  
Deleting, 22, 102, 105, 119–120, Focus. See autofocus; focus  
133–134, 142. See also Memory mode; manual focus  
card, formatting  
all images, 134  
playback menu, 133–134  
selected images, 134  
single-frame playback, 22, 105 Focus mode, 51–52  
Depth-of-field preview, 62  
Design rule for Camera File  
system, 135, 202  
Digital Print Order Format, 113,  
139, 202  
Diopter, 16, 181  
DPOF. See Digital Print Order  
Format  
Manual focus, 51, 60  
Focal plane mark, 3, 60  
Memory buffer, 26, 27  
Memory card, 14–15  
approved, 183  
capacity of, 196  
formatting, 14, 116  
Metering, 61  
3D color matrix, 61, 156  
center-weighted, 61, 155, 156  
color matrix, 61, 156  
spot, 61 ,156  
Microdrive. See memory card  
Mirror up. See Shooting mode  
Monitor, 4, 9, 22, 184, 188  
auto off, 157  
Focus area (focus brackets),  
18, 53, 54, 55–56, 141, 148,  
149–150, 151  
Focus lock, 20, 56–57  
Focus zone, 55–56  
Focusing screen, 7  
Folders, 128, 135  
FV lock, 81–82, 170  
G
GPS, 96  
data, 99–100  
Group dynamic-AF. See AF-area  
mode  
brightness of, 116  
cover, 9, 188  
Monochrome. See Black-and-  
white  
H
MUP. See Shooting mode  
Highlight display, 99–101, 141  
Histogram, 99–101, 141  
RGB, 100, 141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
209  
N
Single-frame playback, 22, 98  
Size. See Image size  
NEF, 28–29, 31  
Software, 50, 107, 110, 182  
Speedlight, 163–166, 177–180.  
See also fl ash  
Nikon Capture 4, 39, 47, 107–  
109, 110, 118, 121, 122, 182  
Noise, 34  
sRGB. See SHOOTING MENU,  
Color space  
reduction, 131  
high sensitivities, 34, 131  
slow shutter speeds, 65,  
68, 131  
T
Television, 106, 117  
NORMAL. See Image quality  
Time. See SET UP, World Time  
Time exposures. See Long time-  
exposures  
Time zone. See SET UP, World  
Time  
P
PictBridge. See Printing photo-  
graphs  
Picture Transfer Protocol. See  
PTP  
Photo information, 99–101  
Playback, 22, 98–105  
Thumbnail playback, 102  
Two-button reset, 97  
U
Playback menu, 133–142  
PRE. See White balance, preset  
Predictive focus tracking, 52  
Printing photographs, 110–114.  
See also Digital Print Order  
Format  
USB, 107, 108–109, 110, 111, 121.  
See also computer  
V
Video device, 106, 117  
Video out, 2, 106  
Viewfinder, 6–7, 16  
focus. See Diopter  
Protecting images, 104  
PTP, 107, 108–109, 110, 111, 121  
W
R
White balance, 18, 35–44, 166,  
197  
bracketing, 43–44, 166, 197  
color temperature, 38  
fi ne-tuning, 37  
RAW, 28–29, 31. See also Image  
quality; NEF  
Recommended exposure index.  
See ISO sensitivity  
Red-eye reduction, 77, 78–79,  
178  
preset, 39–42  
S
S. See Autofocus, single-servo;  
Exposure mode, shutter-pri-  
ority auto; Shooting mode  
Self-portraits. See Self-timer  
Self-timer, 26, 83  
Sensitivity. See ISO sensitivity  
Sequential file numbering, 159  
Setup menu, 115–123  
Shutter speed, 62–69  
and flash synchronization, 77,  
78–79, 160, 161  
Shooting menu, 124–132  
banks, 125–126  
Shooting mode, 26–27  
Single-frame. See Shooting  
mode  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
210  
No reproduction in any form of this manual, in  
whole or in part (except for brief quotation in critical  
articles or reviews), may be made without written  
authorization from NIKON CORPORATION.  
Printed in Belgium  
6MBA5111-01  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Miele Washer W 489i WPS User Manual
MTX Audio Speaker 825W1 User Manual
Net Optics Network Card Link Aggregator Tap 10 100 In Line to GigaBit with SFP Monitor Ports User Manual
NordicTrack Treadmill CTL8250 User Manual
Nortel Networks IP Phone N0027379 01 User Manual
Omron Healthcare Thermometer MC 514 User Manual
Onkyo DVD Player DV SP503E User Manual
Oregon Grinder 511A User Manual
Panasonic Fax Machine KX FPW111 User Manual
Panasonic Switch AB5 User Manual